Witam AI2 - zadawanie prędkości. L1 - włączanie /obroty/. Prawdopodobnie dwie maszyny synchronizowały się ze sobą. Poniżej instrukcja.
2354235 11/2008
ACOPOSinverter X64
Variable speed drives for
asynchronous motors
Installation Manual
Version:
Model number:
0.20 (April 2011)
MAxxxxxxx-ENG
All information contained in this manual is current as of its creation/publication. We reserve the right to change the contents of this manual
without warning. The information contained herein is believed to be accurate as of the date of publication; however, Bernecker + Rainer
Industrie-Elektronik Ges.m.b.H. makes no warranty, expressed or implied, with regard to the products or the documentation contained
within this book. In addition, Bernecker + Rainer Industrie-Elektronik Ges.m.b.H. shall not be liable in the event of incidental or
consequential damages in connection with or resulting from the furnishing, performance, or use of these products. The software names,
hardware names, and trademarks used in this document are registered by the respective companies.
Table of Contents
Manual history ..............................................................................................................................................................4
Important Information ...................................................................................................................................................5
Before you begin ..........................................................................................................................................................6
Steps for setting up ......................................................................................................................................................8
Setup - Preliminary recommendations .........................................................................................................................9
Drive ratings ...............................................................................................................................................................10
Dimensions and weights ............................................................................................................................................12
Mounting ....................................................................................................................................................................15
Wiring .........................................................................................................................................................................18
Check list ....................................................................................................................................................................33
Maintenance ...............................................................................................................................................................34
Short-circuit rating and branch circuit protection ........................................................................................................35
3
Manual history
Version
Date
Comment
0.20
December 2010
Editorial modifications
0.11
August 2010
Editorial modifications
0.10
4
April 2011
0.12
Modifications of descriptions
June 2009
First edition
Important Information
NOTICE
Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before trying to install, operate, or maintain
it. The following special messages may appear throughout this documentation or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call
attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure.
The addition of this symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label indicates that an electrical hazard exists, which will result in
personal injury if the instructions are not followed.
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow
this symbol to avoid possible injury or death.
DANGER
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, can result in death, serious injury or
equipment damage.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, can result in injury or equipment
damage.
CAUTION
CAUTION, used without the safety alert symbol, indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can
result in equipment damage.
PLEASE NOTE
The word " drive " as used in this manual refers to the controller portion of the adjustable speed drive as defined by NEC.
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by
B & R for any consequences arising out of the use of this product.
5
Before you begin
Read and understand these instructions before performing any procedure with this drive.
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
• Read and understand this manual before installing or operating the ACOPOSinverter X64 drive. Installation, adjustment, repair, and
maintenance must be performed by qualified personnel.
• The user is responsible for compliance with all international and national electrical code requirements with respect to grounding of
all equipment.
• Many parts of this drive, including the printed circuit boards, operate at the line voltage. DO NOT TOUCH. Use only electrically
insulated tools.
• DO NOT touch unshielded components or terminal strip screw connections with voltage present.
• DO NOT short across terminals PA/+ and PC/– or across the DC bus capacitors.
• Before servicing the drive:
-
Disconnect all power, including external control power that may be present.
Place a “DO NOT TURN ON” label on all power disconnects.
Lock all power disconnects in the open position.
WAIT 15 MINUTES to allow the DC bus capacitors to discharge. Then follow the “DC bus voltage measurement procedure”
page 17 to verify that the DC voltage is less than 42 V. The drive LEDs are not indicators of the absence of DC bus voltage.
• Install and close all covers before applying power or starting and stopping the drive.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• Read and understand this manual before installing or operating the ACOPOSinverter X64 drive.
• Any changes made to the parameter settings must be performed by qualified personnel.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
DAMAGED DRIVE EQUIPMENT
Do not operate or install any drive or drive accessory that appears damaged.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
• The designer of any control scheme must consider the potential failure modes of control paths and, for certain critical control functions,
provide a means to achieve a safe state during and after a path failure. Examples of critical control functions are emergency stop and
overtravel stop.
• Separate or redundant control paths must be provided for critical control functions.
• System control paths may include communication links. Consideration must be given to the implications of unanticipated transmission
delays or failures of the link.a
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
a. For additional information, refer to NEMA ICS 1.1 (latest edition), “Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Control” and to
NEMA ICS 7.1 (latest edition), “Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation and Operation of Adjustable-Speed Drive Systems.”
6
Before you begin
CAUTION
INCOMPATIBLE LINE VOLTAGE
Before turning on and configuring the drive, ensure that the line voltage is compatible with the supply voltage range shown on the drive
nameplate. The drive may be damaged if the line voltage is not compatible.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
The use of external overload protection is required under the following conditions:
• Repowering up the product since there is no motor thermal state memory.
• Running multiple motors.
• Running motors rated at less than 0.2 times the nominal drive current.
• Using motor switching.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage
7
Steps for setting up
INSTALLATION
1. Receive and inspect the drive
v Check that the catalog number printed on the label is the same as that on
the purchase order.
v Remove the ACOPOSinverter from its packaging and check that it has not
been damaged in transit.
2. Check the line voltage
v Check that the voltage range of the drive is compatible
with the line voltage (see pages 10 and 11).
Steps 2 to 4 must
be performed with
the power off.
3. Mount the drive
v Mount the drive in accordance with the
instructions in this document (see page 15).
v Install any options required (see option
documentation).
4. Wire the drive (see page 18)
v Connect the motor, ensuring that its
connections correspond to the voltage.
v Connect the line supply, after making
sure that the power is off.
v Connect the control part.
PROGRAMMING
5. Please refer to the
programming manual.
8
Setup - Preliminary recommendations
Prior to switching on the drive
DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Ensure that all logic inputs are inactive to help prevent an accidental startup.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
Prior to configuring the drive
DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• Read and understand this manual before installing or operating the ACOPOSinverter X64 drive.
• Any changes made to the parameter settings must be performed by qualified personnel.
• Ensure that all logic inputs are inactive to help prevent an accidental startup when modifying parameters.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
Line contactor
CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE DRIVE
• Avoid operating the contactor frequently to avoid premature aging of the filter capacitors.
• Power cycling must be more than 60 seconds.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
9
Drive ratings
Single phase supply voltage: 200…240 V 50/60 Hz
For three phase output 200/240 V motors
Motor
Line supply (input)
Power
indicated
on plate (1)
Max. current line
(2)
at 200 V
Drive (output)
Apparent
power
Max.
inrush
current
(3)
Power
dissipated
at nominal
current
at 240 V
Nominal
current
(1)
Reference (5)
Size
Max.
transient
current (1)
(4)
at 240 V
kW
HP
A
A
kVA
A
W
A
A
0.18
0.25
3.0
2.5
0.37
0.5
5.3
4.4
0.6
10
24
1.5
2.3
8I64S200018.00X-1
3
1.0
10
41
3.3
5.0
8I64S200037.00X-1
3
0.55
0.75
6.8
5.8
1.4
10
46
3.7
5.6
8I64S200055.00X-1
4
0.75
1
8.9
7.5
1.8
10
60
4.8
7.2
8I64S200075.00X-1
4
1.1
1.5
12.1
10.2
2.4
19
74
6.9
10.4
8I64S200110.00X-1
6
1.5
2
15.8
13.3
3.2
19
90
8.0
12.0
8I64S200150.00X-1
6
2.2
3
21.9
18.4
4.4
19
123
11.0
16.5
8I64S200220.00X-1
7
Reference (5)
Size
Three phase supply voltage: 200…240 V 50/60 Hz
For three phase output 200/240 V motors
Motor
Line supply (input)
Power
indicated
on plate (1)
Max. current line
(2)
at 200 V
Drive (output)
Apparent
power
Max.
inrush
current
(3)
Power
dissipated
at nominal
current
at 240 V
Nominal
current
(1)
Max.
transient
current (1)
(4)
at 240 V
kW
HP
A
A
kVA
A
W
A
A
0.18
0.25
2.1
1.9
0.7
10
23
1.5
2.3
8I64T200018.00X-1
1
0.37
0.5
3.8
3.3
1.3
10
38
3.3
5.0
8I64T200037.00X-1
1
0.55
0.75
4.9
4.2
1.7
10
43
3.7
5.6
8I64T200055.00X-1
2
0.75
1
6.4
5.6
2.2
10
55
4.8
7.2
8I64T200075.00X-1
2
1.1
1.5
8.5
7.4
3.0
10
71
6.9
10.4
8I64T200110.00X-1
5
1.5
2
11.1
9.6
3.8
10
86
8.0
12.0
8I64T200150.00X-1
5
2.2
3
14.9
13.0
5.2
10
114
11.0
16.5
8I64T200220.00X-1
6
3
3
19.1
16.6
6.6
19
146
13.7
20.6
8I64T200300.00X-1
7
4
5
24
21.1
8.4
19
180
17.5
26.3
8I64T200400.00X-1
7
5.5
7.5
36.8
32.0
12.8
23
292
27.5
41.3
8I64T200550.00X-1
8
7.5
10
46.8
40.9
16.2
23
388
33.0
49.5
8I64T200750.00X-1
8
11
15
63.5
55.6
22.0
93
477
54.0
81.0
8I64T201100.00X-1
9
15
20
82.1
71.9
28.5
93
628
66.0
99.0
8I64T201500.00X-1
9
(1) These power ratings and currents are for a maximum ambient temperature of 50°C and a switching frequency of 4 kHz in continuous
operation.The switching frequency is adjustable from 2 to 16 kHz.
Above 4 kHz, the drive will reduce the switching frequency in the event of excessive temperature rise. The temperature rise is controlled
by a sensor in the power module. Nonetheless, the nominal drive current should be derated if operation above 4 kHz needs to be
continuous.
Derating curves are shown on page 16 as a function of switching frequency, ambient temperature and mounting conditions.
(2) Current on a line supply with the " Max. prospective line Isc " indicated.
(3) Peak current on power-up, for the max. voltage (240 V + 10%).
(4) The maximum transient current for 60 s corresponds to 150% of the maximum nominal current In, followed by at most nominal current
for 9 min.
(5) Reference of the drive with communication interface, e. g. 8I64S200018.00X-1 consists of 8I64S200018.000-1 (drive) and
8I0IF109.200-1 (interface).
10
Drive ratings (continued)
.
Three phase supply voltage: 380…500 V 50/60 Hz
For three phase output 380/500 V motors
Motor
Line supply (input)
Power
indicated
on plate (1)
Max. current line
(2)
at 380 V
Drive (output)
Apparent
power
Max.
inrush
current
(3)
Power
dissipated
at nominal
current
at 500 V
Nominal
current
(1)
Reference (5)
Size
Max.
transient
current (1)
(4)
at 500 V
kW
HP
A
A
kVA
A
W
A
A
0.37
0.5
2.2
1.7
1.5
10
32
1.5
2.3
8I64T400037.00X-1
6
0.55
0.75
2.8
2.2
1.8
10
37
1.9
2.9
8I64T400055.00X-1
6
0.75
1
3.6
2.7
2.4
10
41
2.3
3.5
8I64T400075.00X-1
6
1.1
1.5
4.9
3.7
3.2
10
48
3.0
4.5
8I64T400110.00X-1
6
1.5
2
6.4
4.8
4.2
10
61
4.1
6.2
8I64T400150.00X-1
6
2.2
3
8.9
6.7
5.9
10
79
5.5
8.3
8I64T400220.00X-1
7
3
3
10.9
8.3
7.1
10
125
7.1
10.7
8I64T400300.00X-1
7
4
5
13.9
10.6
9.2
10
150
9.5
14.3
8I64T400400.00X-1
7
5.5
7.5
21.9
16.5
15.0
30
232
14.3
21.5
8I64T400550.00X-1
8
7.5
10
27.7
21.0
18.0
30
269
17.0
25.5
8I64T400750.00X-1
8
11
15
37.2
28.4
25.0
97
397
27.7
41.6
8I64T401100.00X-1
9
15
20
48.2
36.8
32.0
97
492
33.0
49.5
8I64T401500.00X-1
9
(1) These power ratings and currents are for a maximum ambient temperature of 50°C and a switching frequency of 4 kHz in continuous
operation. The switching frequency is adjustable from 2 to 16 kHz.
Above 4 kHz, the drive will reduce the switching frequency in the event of excessive temperature rise. The temperature rise is controlled
by a sensor in the power module. Nonetheless, the nominal drive current should be derated if operation above 4 kHz needs to be
continuous.
Derating curves are shown on page 16 as a function of switching frequency, ambient temperature and mounting conditions.
(2) Current on a line supply with the " Max. prospective line Isc " indicated.
(3) Peak current on power-up, for the max. voltage (500 V + 10%, 600 V + 10%).
(4) The maximum transient current for 60 s corresponds to 150% of the maximum nominal current In, followed by at most nominal current
for 9 min.
(5) Reference of the drive with communication interface, e. g. 8I64S200018.00X-1 consists of 8I64S200018.000-1 (drive) and
8I0IF109.200-1 (interface).
11
Dimensions and weights
a
b
mm (in.) mm (in.)
C
mm (in.)
D
mm (in.)
G
mm (in.)
H
mm (in.)
J
mm (in.)
K
mm (in.)
Ø
mm (in.)
Weight
kg (lb)
8I64T200018.00X-1
8I64T200037.00X-1
72
(2.83)
145
(5.70)
122
(4.80)
6
(0.24)
60
(2.36)
121.5
(4.76)
2x5
(2x0.2)
18.5
(0.73)
2x5
(2x0.2)
0.9
(1.98)
8I64T200055.00X-1
8I64T200075.00X-1
72
(2.83)
145
(5.70)
132
(5.19)
6
(0.24)
60
(2.36)
121.5
(4.76)
2x5
(2x0.2)
18.5
(0.73)
2x5
(2x0.2)
0.9
(1.98)
8I64S200018.00X-1
8I64S200037.00X-1
72
(2.83)
145
(5.70)
132
(5.19)
6
(0.24)
60
(2.36)
121.5
(4.76)
2x5
(2x0.2)
18.5
(0.73)
2x5
(2x0.2)
1.05
(2.31)
8I64S200055.00X-1
8I64S200075.00X-1
72
(2.83)
145
(5.70)
142
(5.59)
6
(0.24)
60
(2.36)
121.5
(4.76)
2x5
(2x0.2)
18.5
(0.73)
2x5
(2x0.2)
1.05
(2.31)
12
Dimensions and weights (continued)
a
mm (in.)
b
mm (in.)
C
mm (in.)
D
mm (in.)
G
mm (in.)
H
mm (in.)
J
mm (in.)
K
mm (in.)
Ø
Weight
mm (in.) kg (lb)
8I64T200110.00X-1
8I64T200150.00X-1
105
(4.13)
143
(5.63)
132
(5.19)
6
(0.24)
93
(3.66)
121.5
(4.76)
5
(0.2)
16.5
(0.65)
2x5
(2x0.2)
1.25
(2.76)
8I64S200110.00X-1
8I64S200150.00X-1
8I64T200220.00X-1
8I64T400037.00X-1
8I64T400055.00X-1
8I64T400075.00X-1
8I64T400110.00X-1
8I64T400150.00X-1
107
(4.21)
143
(5.63)
152
(5.98)
6
(0.24)
93
(3.66)
121.5
(4.76)
5
(0.2)
16.5
(0.65)
2x5
(2x0.2)
1.35
(2.98)
8I64S200220.00X-1
8I64T200300.00X-1
8I64T200400.00X-1
8I64T400220.00X-1
8I64T400300.00X-1
8I64T400400.00X-1
142
(5.59)
184
(7.24)
152
(5.98)
6
(0.24)
126
(4.96)
157
(6.18)
6.5
(0.26)
20.5
(0.81)
4x5
(4x0.2)
2.35
(5.18)
13
Dimensions and weights (continued)
a
mm (in.)
8I64T201100.00X-1
8I64T201500.00X-1
8I64T401100.00X-1
8I64T401500.00X-1
14
C
mm (in.)
D
mm (in.)
G
mm (in.)
H
mm (in.)
J
mm (in.)
K
mm (in.)
Ø
mm (in.)
Weight
kg (lb)
180
(7.09)
232
(9.13)
172
(6.77)
6
(0.24)
160
(6.30)
210
(8.27)
5
(0.2)
17
(0.67)
4x5
(4x0.2)
4.70
(10.36)
a
mm (in.)
8I64T200550.00X-1
8I64T200750.00X-1
8I64T400550.00X-1
8I64T400750.00X-1
b
mm (in.)
b
mm (in.)
C
mm (in.)
D
mm (in.)
G
mm (in.)
H
mm (in.)
J
mm (in.)
K
mm (in.)
Ø
mm (in.)
Weight
kg (lb)
245
(9.65)
329.5
(12.97)
192
(7.56)
6
(0.24)
225
(8.86)
295
(11.61)
7
(0.28)
27.5
(1.08)
4x6
(4x0.24)
9
(19.84)
Mounting
Mounting and temperature conditions
50 mm
Install the unit vertically, at ± 10°.
Do not place it close to heating elements.
Leave sufficient free space so that the air required for cooling purposes can circulate from the bottom to the top of
the unit.
Free space in front of unit: 10 mm (0.39 in.) minimum.
50 mm
When IP20 protection is adequate, we recommend that the vent cover on the top of the drive be removed, as
shown below.
Removing the vent cover
Example 8I64T200110.00X-1
Mounting types
3 types of mounting are possible:
Type A
mounting:
u 50 mm
2 in.
u 50 mm
2 in.
Type B
mounting:
Free space u 50 mm (2 in.) on each side, with
vent cover fitted. Mounting type A is suitable
for drive operation at surrounding air
temperature less or equal to 50°C (122°F).
Drives mounted side-by-side, vent cover
should be removed (the degree of protection
becomes IP20).
.
Type C
mounting:
u 50 mm
2 in.
u 50 mm
2 in.
Free space u 50 mm (2 in.) on each side. Vent
cover should be removed for operation at
surrounding air temperature above 50°C
(122°F). The degree of protection becomes
IP20
Note: For switching frequencies above 4 kHz and derating conditions, please refer to the derating curves for guidelines.
15
Mounting (continued)
Derating curves
Derating curves for the drive current In as a function of the temperature, switching frequency and type of mounting.
I/In
In = 100 %
-5%
- 10 %
90 %
- 10 %
- 15 %
- 20 %
80 %
40°C (104°F) mounting types A, B and C
- 25 %
- 30 %
70 %
50°C (122°F) mounting type C
- 35 %
- 40 %
60 %
- 50 %
50 %
- 25 %
- 35 %
- 45 %
- 55 %
40 %
- 65 %
50°C (122°F) mounting types A and B
60°C (140°F) mounting type C
60°C (140°F) mounting types A and B
30 %
Switching frequency
4 kHz
8 kHz
12 kHz
16 kHz
For intermediate temperatures (e.g. 55°C; 131 °F), interpolate between 2 curves.
Flow of air
If you are installing the drives in enclosures, make provision for a flow of air at least equal to the value given in the table below for each drive.
Flow rate
3
m /hour
ft3/min
8I64S200018.00X-1, 8I64S200037.00X-1, 8I64S200055.00X-1
8I64T200018.00X-1, 8I64T200037.00X-1, 8I64T200055.00X-1
8I64T400037.00X-1, 8I64T400055.00X-1, 8I64T400075.00X-1, 8I64T400110.00X-1
18
11
8I64S200075.00X-1, 8I64S200110.00X-1, 8I64S200150.00X-1
8I64T200075.00X-1, 8I64T200110.00X-1, 8I64T200150.00X-1
8I64T400150.00X-1, 8I64T400220.00X-1
33
19
8I64S200220.00X-1
8I64T200220.00X-1, 8I64T200300.00X-1, 8I64T200400.00X-1
8I64T400300.00X-1, 8I64T400400.00X-1
93
55
8I64T200550.00X-1
8I64T400550.00X-1, 8I64T400750.00X-1
102
60
8I64T200750.00X-1, 8I64T201100.00X-1
8I64T401100.00X-1, 8I64T401500.00X-1
168
99
8I64T201500.00X-1
216
127
16
Mounting (continued)
Installing the EMC plates
EMC mounting plate: Supplied with the drive
Fix the EMC equipotentiality mounting plate to the holes in the ACOPOSinverter X64 heatsink using the 2 screws supplied, as shown in the
drawings below.
Size 1 - 4
Size 5 - 7
2
screws
Size 8
Size 9
2
screws
2
screws
2
screws
Screws supplied:
4 x M4 screws for fixing the EMC clamps (clamps not supplied)
1 x M5 screw for ground
Size
8I64T200018.00X-1, 8I64T200037.00X-1
1
8I64T200055.00X-1, 8I64T200075.00X-1
2
8I64S200018.00X-1, 8I64S200037.00X-1
3
8I64S200055.00X-1, 8I64S200075.00X-1
4
8I64T200110.00X-1, 8I64T200150.00X-1
5
8I64S200110.00X-1, 8I64S200150.00X-1
8I64T200220.00X-1, 8I64T400037.00X-1
8I64T400055.00X-1, 8I64T400075.00X-1
8I64T400110.00X-1, 8I64T400150.00X-1
Size
8I64S200220.00X-1, 8I64T200300.00X-1
8I64T200400.00X-1, 8I64T400220.00X-1
8I64T400300.00X-1, 8I64T400400.00X-1
6
7
8I64T200550.00X-1, 8I64T200750.00X-1
8I64T400550.00X-1, 8I64T400750.00X-1
8
8I64T201100.00X-1, 8I64T201500.00X-1
8I64T401100.00X-1, 8I64T401500.00X-1
9
DC bus voltage measurement procedure
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
Read and understand the precautions in “Before you begin” page 6 before performing this procedure.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
The DC bus voltage can exceed 933 Vdc. Use a properly rated voltage-sensing device when performing this procedure. To measure the
DC bus voltage:
1. Disconnect all power.
2. Wait 15 minutes to allow the DC bus to discharge.
3. Measure the voltage of the DC bus between the PA/+ and PC/– terminals to ensure that the voltage is less than 42 Vdc.
4. If the DC bus capacitors do not discharge completely, contact your local B & R office. Do not repair or operate the drive.
17
Wiring
Recommendations
Power and circuit protection
The drive must be grounded to conform with the regulations concerning high leakage currents (over 3.5 mA).
Where local and national codes require upstream protection by means of a residual current device, use a type A device for single-phase
drives and a type B device for three-phase drives as defined in the IEC Standard 60755.
Choose a suitable model integrating:
• High frequency current filtering,
• A time delay that helps to prevent tripping caused by the load from stray capacitance on power-up.
The time delay is not possible for 30 mA devices; in this case, choose devices with immunity against nuisance tripping.
If the installation includes several drives, provide one " residual current device " per drive.
Keep the power cables separate from circuits in the installation with low-level signals (detectors, PLCs, measuring apparatus, video,
telephone).
If you are using cables longer than 50 m (164 ft) between the drive and the motor, add output filters.
Control
Keep the control circuits away from the power cables. For control and speed reference circuits, we recommend using shielded twisted
cables with a pitch of between 25 and 50 mm (1 and 2 in.), connecting the shielding to ground at each end.
Equipment Grounding
Ground the drive according to local and national code requirements. A minimum wire size of 10 mm² (6 AWG) may be required to meet
standards limiting leakage current.
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
• The drive panel must be properly grounded before power is applied.
• Use the provided ground connecting point as shown in the figure below.
• Do not loop the ground cables of mains supply and grounding connection point on the bottom of the drive.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
• Ensure that the resistance of the ground is one ohm or less.
• When grounding several drives, you must connect each one directly, as shown in the figure
to the left.
• Do not loop the ground cables or connect them in series.
WARNING
IMPROPER WIRING PRACTICES
• The ACOPOSinverter X64 drive will be damaged if input line voltage is applied to the output terminals (U/T1,V/T2,W/T3).
• Check the power connections before energizing the ACOPOSinverter X64 drive.
• If replacing another drive, verify that all wiring connections to the ACOPOSinverter X64 drive comply with wiring instructions in this
manual page 33.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
WARNING
INADEQUATE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
• Overcurrent protective devices must be properly coordinated.
• The Canadian Electrical Code and the National Electrical Code require branch circuit protection. Use the fuses recommended in the
installation manual.
• Do not connect the drive to a power feeder whose short-circuit capacity exceeds the drive short-circuit current rating listed in this
manual page 33.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
18
Wiring (continued)
General wiring diagram
(1) Line choke, if used (single phase or 3-phase)
(2) If a braking resistor is connected, set [Dec ramp adapt.] (brA) parameter to yes (refer to the progamming manual).
Note 1: Use interference suppressors on all inductive circuits near the drive or coupled to the same circuit (relays, contactors,
solenoid valves, etc).
Note 2: This diagram is for the standard ACOPOSinverter X64 products. Optional communication cards may change the control wiring of
the product.
Please see the associated documentation for the option cards for details.
Choice of associated components:
Please refer to the catalogue.
19
Wiring (continued)
Logic input common
The Logical input common (CLI) assigns the logical inputs to sink or source operation:
Source operation
Sink operation
(1) See page 25 to locate the switch on the terminal board.
DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• Prevent accidental grounding of logic inputs configured for sink logic. Accidental grounding can result in unintended activation of drive
functions.
• Protect the signal conductors against damage that could result in unintentional conductor grounding.
• Follow NFPA 79 and EN 60204 guidelines for proper control circuit grounding practices.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
20
Wiring (continued)
Power terminals
Access to the power terminals
To access the terminals the front door has to be opened. Before opening and maintaining the drive, take care of the ESD details below.
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH.
Replace the cover plate on the terminals and close the door before applying power.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Before maintaining the drive, take care of the following ESD details:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do not touch the connector contacts on connected cables.
Do not touch the contact tips on the circuit boards
Any persons handling electrical components or devices that will be installed in the electrical components must be grounded
Components can only be touched on the small sides or on the front plate
Components should always be stored in a suitable medium (ESD packaging, conductive foam, etc.). Metallic surfaces are not suitable
storage surfaces!
Electrostatic discharges should be avoided on the components (e.g. through charged plastics)
A minimum distance of 10 cm must be kept from monitors and TV sets
Measurement devices and equipment must be grounded
Measurement probes on potential-free measurement devices must be discharged on sufficiently grounded surfaces before taking
measurements
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage
21
Wiring (continued)
Functions of the power terminals
Terminal
Function
For ACOPOSinverter X64
t
Ground terminal
All ratings
R/L1 - S/L2
Power supply
8I64S2*****.00X-1
R/L1 - S/L2 - T/L3
8I64T2*****.00X-1
8I64T4*****.00X-1
PO
DC bus + polarity
All ratings
PA/+
Output to braking resistor (+ polarity)
All ratings
PB
Output to braking resistor
All ratings
PC/-
DC bus - polarity
All ratings
U/T1 - V/T2 - W/T3
Outputs to the motor
All ratings
Arrangement and caracteristics of the power terminals
CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE DRIVE
• Never remove the link between PO and PA/+.
• The PO and PA/+ terminal screws must always be fully tightened as a high current flows through the link.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage
8I64T200018.00X-1 to 8I64T200075.00X-1
Applicable
wire size (1)
Tightening
torque
mm² (AWG)
mm² (AWG)
N·m (lb.in)
2.5
(14)
2.5
(14)
0.8
(7.1)
Applicable
wire size (1)
Recommended
wire size (2)
Tightening
torque
mm² (AWG)
8I64T200018.00X-1
8I64T200037.00X-1
8I64T200055.00X-1
8I64T200075.00X-1
Recommended
wire size (2)
mm² (AWG)
N·m (lb.in)
2.5
(14)
2.5
(14)
0.8
(7.1)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
P0 PA/+ PB PC/- U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
8I64S200018.00X-1 to 8I64S200075.00X-1
8I64S200018.00X-1
8I64S200037.00X-1
8I64S200055.00X-1
8I64S200075.00X-1
R/L1 S/L2
P0 PA/+ PB PC/- U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
(1) The value in bold corresponds to the minimum wire gauge to permit secureness.
(2) 75°C (167 °F) copper cable (minimum wire size for rated use).
22
Wiring (continued)
8I64T200110.00X-1 to 8I64T200400.00X-1
8I64T400037.00X-1 to 8I64T400400.00X-1
Applicable
wire size (1)
Recommended
wire size (2)
Tightening
torque
mm² (AWG)
mm² (AWG)
N·m (lb.in)
8I64T200110.00X-1
8I64T200150.00X-1
8I64T400037.00X-1
8I64T400055.00X-1
8I64T400075.00X-1
8I64T400110.00X-1
8I64T400150.00X-1
2.5 to 6
(14 to 10)
2.5
(14)
0.8
(7.1)
8I64T200220.00X-1
2.5 to 6
(14 to 10)
3.5
(12)
1.2
(10.7)
8I64T200300.00X-1
8I64T200400.00X-1
6
(10)
6
(10)
1.2
(10.7)
8I64T400220.00X-1
8I64T400300.00X-1
2.5 to 6
(14 to 10)
2.5
(14)
1.2
(10.7)
8I64T400400.00X-1
4 to 6
(12 to 10)
4
(12)
1.2
(10.7)
Applicable
wire size (1)
Recommended
wire size (2)
Tightening
torque
mm² (AWG)
mm² (AWG)
N·m (lb.in)
8I64S200110.00X-1
8I64S200150.00X-1
2.5 to 6
(14 to 10)
3.5
(12)
1.2
(10.7)
8I64S200220.00X-1
4 to 6
(12 to 10)
4
(12)
1.2
(10.7)
Applicable
wire size (1)
Recommended
wire size (2)
Tightening
torque
mm² (AWG)
mm² (AWG)
N·m (lb.in)
8I64T200550.00X-1
10 to 16
(8 to 6)
10
(8)
2.5
(22.3)
8I64T200750.00X-1
16
(6)
16
(6)
2.5
(22.3)
8I64T400550.00X-1
6 to 16
(10 to 6)
6
(10)
2.5
(22.3)
8I64T400750.00X-1
10 to 16
(8 to 6)
16
(6)
2.5
(22.3)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
P0 PA/+ PB PC/- U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
8I64S200110.00X-1 to 8I64S200220.00X-1
R/L1 S/L2
P0 PA/+ PB PC/- U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
8I64T200550.00X-1, 8I64T200750.00X-1
8I64T400550.00X-1, 8I64T400750.00X-1
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 P0 PA/+ PB PC/- U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
(1) The value in bold corresponds to the minimum wire gauge to permit secureness.
(2) 75°C (167 °F) copper cable (minimum wire size for rated use).
23
Wiring (continued)
8I64T201100.00X-1, 8I64T201500.00X-1
8I64T401100.00X-1, 8I64T401500.00X-1
Applicable
wire size (1)
Recommended
wire size (2)
Tightening
torque
mm² (AWG)
mm² (AWG)
N·m (lb.in)
8I64T201100.00X-1
10 to 25
(8 to 4)
25
(4)
4.5
(40.1)
8I64T201500.00X-1
8I64T401500.00X-1
10 to 25
(8 to 4)
16
(6)
4.5
(40.1)
8I64T401100.00X-1
10 to 25
(8 to 4)
10
(8)
4.5
(40.1)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 P0 PA/+ PB PC/- U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
(1) The value in bold corresponds to the minimum wire gauge to permit secureness.
(2) 75°C (167 °F) copper cable (minimum wire size for rated use).
24
Wiring (continued)
Control terminals
Access to the control terminals
To access the terminals the front door has to be opened. Before opening and maintaining the drive, take care of the ESD details below.
Arrangement of the control terminals
ACOPOSinverter X64 Control terminals
All terminals
Applicable wire size (1)
mm² (AWG)
0.5 to 1.5 (20 to 16)
(1) The value in bold corresponds to the minimum wire gauge to permit secureness.
25
Wiring (continued)
DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• Do not plug or unplug the terminal board while drive is powered.
• Check the tightening of the fixing screw after any manipulation on the terminal board.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
Do not touch the terminal board before :
• removing power on the drive,
• removing any voltage on input and output terminals.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Before maintaining the drive, take care of the following ESD details:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do not touch the connector contacts on connected cables.
Do not touch the contact tips on the circuit boards
Any persons handling electrical components or devices that will be installed in the electrical components must be grounded
Components can only be touched on the small sides or on the front plate
Components should always be stored in a suitable medium (ESD packaging, conductive foam, etc.). Metallic surfaces are not suitable
storage surfaces!
Electrostatic discharges should be avoided on the components (e.g. through charged plastics)
A minimum distance of 10 cm must be kept from monitors and TV sets
Measurement devices and equipment must be grounded
Measurement probes on potential-free measurement devices must be discharged on sufficiently grounded surfaces before taking
measurements
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage
26
Wiring (continued)
Characteristics and functions of the control terminals
Terminal
Function
Electrical characteristics
R2A
R2C
N/O contact of programmable relay
R2
• Min. switching capacity: 10 mA for 5 V c
• Max. switching capacity on resistive load (cos = 1 and L/R = 0 ms):
2 A for 250 V a and 30 V c
• Max. switching capacity on inductive load (cos = 0.4 and L/R = 7 ms):
1.5 A for 250 V a and 30 V c
• Sampling time: 8 ms
• Service life: 100,000 operations at max. switching power
+24V
Power supply for X2X interface
MANDATORY
• +24 VDC (min. 18 V, max. 30 V)
• Power: 1.6 W at 24 VDC
GND
Common
GND for 24 VDC power supply
DO1
Digital Output
• Switching voltage: 18 to 30 VDC
• Diagnostic status: Output monitoring with 100 µs delay
• Leakage current when switched off: 3 µA
• Residual voltage: & lt; 0.3 V @ 0.5 A rated current
• Short circuit peak current: & lt; 35 A
• Switching on after overload or short circuit cutoff: & lt; 20 µs
• Switching delay:
0 → 1: & lt; 100 µs
1 → 0: & lt; 300 µs
• Switching frequency at resistive load: max. 100 Hz
• Output circuit: Source
X2X datapoint
LI1
LI2
Logic inputs
• + 24 V power supply (max. 30 V)
• Impedance: 12.1 kΩ
• State 0 if & lt; 5 V, state 1 if & gt; 15 V (voltage difference between LI- and CLI)
• Sampling time: 4 ms
Ground terminal
Recommended wire cross section 1.5 mm² (16 AWG);
The ground terminal connection has to be connected to the EMC plate.
LI3
LI4
Depending on I/O configuration LI3
and LI4 can be used as:
- Logical inputs
or
- Counter Inputs
Same characteristics as LI1 and LI2
Event counter, gate, frequency and period measurement (LI3 and LI4 can not be
used for ACP10SDC library because there is no wire breakage detection possible)
Event counter operation:
• Counter size: 32-bit
• Max. input frequency: 100 kHz
Gate measurement:
• Counter size: 32-bit (16-bit with active overflow recognition)
• Max. input frequency: 100 kHz
• Counter frequency: internal 4 MHz or 31.25 kHz, external max. 100 kHz
• Max. discrepancy with 24 V: ±4 µs
Period measurement:
• Counter size: 32-bit (16-bit with active overflow recognition)
• Max. input frequency: 100 kHz
• Counter frequency: internal 4 MHz or 31.25 kHz, external max. 100 kHz
AB counter operation:
• Counter size: 32-bit
• Max. input frequency: 20 kHz
X2X datapoint
Note:
• Below HW revision B5 the max. counter input frequency is 5 kHz.
• Below HW revision B0 the counter inputs are changed. Counter01 (LI3) and Counter02 (LI4).
27
Wiring (continued)
CLI
Logical inputs common
X2X
X2X GND
X2X\
SHLD
X2X In
X2X
X2X GND
X2X\
SHLD
Source: connect CLI to 24 VDC
Sink: connect CLI to GND
X2X Out
LI3 and LI4 in counter operation only with sink connection possible
X2X+
USBConnector
X2X+ not used
internally connected from X2X+ In to X2X+ Out)
Connection for the graphic display
terminal
LED status
LED status - X2X Link
Red (1)
Green (2)
Description
Off
On
X2X Link supplied, communication is working
On
Off
X2X communication is not working
On
On
Preoperational: X2X Link supplied, module not initialized
LED status - module function
LED
Status
Description
Green (3)
Off
Module not supplied
Single flash
Reset mode
Double flash
Firmware update
Blinking
Preoperational
On
Run mode
Red (4)
28
Off
Module not supplied or everything is OK
On
Error or reset state
Wiring (continued)
Counter settings
AB counter operation
If the counter input configuration is set to AB counter then the LI3 and LI4 is a 32-bit AB counter whose actual value is found in the I/O
mapping under the counter 01.
• A = LI4
• B = LI3
Event counter operation
If the counter input configuration is on and the channel mode is set to event counter, two 32-bit counters are available.
The measurement can be begin at the decreasing or increasing edge depending on the channel mode.
• Counter 1 = LI4
• Counter 2 = LI3
Period measurement
The measurement can be begin at the decreasing or increasing edge depending on the channel mode. The counter frequency can be set
in two steps (4 MHz or 31.25 kHz) or with an external frequency. The external frequency must however be less than 100 kHz. The measured
counter state is a 32-bit value and is displayed in counter 1 or counter 2.
The frequency of the signal to be measured can be a maximum of 100 kHz.
• Counter 1 = LI4
• Counter 2 = LI3
• Ext. Counting frequency = LI3
Gate measurement
The measurement can be begin at the decreasing or increasing edge depending on the channel mode. Measurement always occurs up to
the next edge. The counter frequency can be set to one of two levels (4 MHz or 31.25 kHz) or with an external frequency. The external
frequency must however be less than 100 kHz. The measured counter state is a 32-bit value and is displayed in counter 1 or counter 2.
The frequency of the signal to be measured can be a maximum of 100 kHz.
• Counter 1 = LI4
• Counter 2 = LI3
• Ext. Counting frequency = LI3
29
Wiring (continued)
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
IMPORTANT: The high frequency equipotential ground connection between the drive, motor, and cable shielding does not eliminate the
need to connect the ground (PE) conductors (green-yellow) to the appropriate terminals on each unit.
Principle and precautions
• Grounds between the drive, motor, and cable shielding must have high frequency equipotentiality.
• When using shielded cable for the motor, use a 4-conductor cable so that one wire will be the ground connection between the motor
and the drive. Size of the ground conductor must be selected in compliance with local and national codes. The shield can then be
grounded at both ends. Metal ducting or conduit can be used for part or all of the shielding length, provided there is no break in
continuity.
• When using shielded cable for Dynamic Brake (DB) resistors, use a 3-conductor cable so that one wire will be the ground connection
between the DB resistor assembly and the drive. The size of the ground conductor must be selected in compliance with local and
national codes. The shield can then be grounded at both ends. Metal ducting or conduit can be used for part or all of the shielding
length, provided there is no break in continuity.
• When using shielded cable for control signals, if the cable is connecting equipment that is close together and the grounds are bonded
together, then both ends of the shield can be grounded. If the cable is connected to equipment that may have a different ground
potential, then ground the shield at one end only to prevent large currents from flowing in the shield. The shield on the ungrounded
end may be tied to ground with a capacitor (for example: 10 nF, 100 V or higher) in order to provide a path for the higher frequency
noise. Keep the control circuits away from the power circuits. For control and speed reference circuits, we recommend using shielded
twisted cables with a pitch of between 25 and 50 mm (1 and 2 in.) Keep the control circuits away from the power circuits. For control
and speed reference circuits, we recommend using shielded twisted cables with a pitch of between 25 and 50 mm (1 and 2 in.)
• Ensure maximum separation between the power supply cable (line supply) and the motor cable.
• The motor cables must be at least 0.5 m (20 in.) long.
• Do not use surge arresters or power factor correction capacitors on the variable speed drive output.
• If using an additional input filter, it should be mounted as closed as possible to the drive and connected directly to the line supply via
an unshielded cable. Link 3 on the drive is via the filter output cable.
• For installation of the optional EMC plate and instructions for meeting IEC 61800-3 standard, refer to the section entitled “Installing
the EMC plates” and the instructions provided with the EMC plates.
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
• Do not expose cable shielding except where connected to ground at the metal cable glands and underneath the grounding clamps.
• Ensure that there is no risk of the shielding coming into contact with live components.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
30
Wiring (continued)
Optional EMC plate installation diagram and instructions (examples)
Installation depends on the drive size. The table below gives the size according to the reference.
Size 1
Size 2
Size 3
Size 4
Size 5
8I64T200018.00X-1
8I64T200037.00X-1
8I64T200055.00X-1
8I64T200075.00X-1
8I64S200018.00X-1
8I64S200037.00X-1
8I64S200055.00X-1
8I64S200075.00X-1
8I64T200110.00X-1
8I64T200150.00X-1
Size 6
Size 7
Size 8
Size 9
8I64S200110.00X-1
8I64S200150.00X-1
8I64T200220.00X-1
8I64T400037.00X-1
8I64T400055.00X-1
8I64T400075.00X-1
8I64T400110.00X-1
8I64T400150.00X-1
8I64S200220.00X-1
8I64T200300.00X-1
8I64T200400.00X-1
8I64T400220.00X-1
8I64T400300.00X-1
8I64T400400.00X-1
8I64T200550.00X-1
8I64T200750.00X-1
8I64T400550.00X-1
8I64T400750.00X-1
8I64T201100.00X-1
8I64T201500.00X-1
8I64T401100.00X-1
8I64T401500.00X-1
Sizes 1 to 4
Size 5 to 7
Size 8
Size 9
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
EMC plate supplied with the drive, to be installed as indicated on the diagram.
ACOPOSinverter X64
Non-shielded power supply wires or cable
Non-shielded wires for relay contacts
Attach and ground the shielding of cables 6, 7 and 8 as close as possible to the drive:
- Strip the shielding.
- Use stainless steel cable clamps of an appropriate size on the parts from which the shielding has been stripped, to attach them to the
plate 1.
The shielding must be clamped tightly to the metal plate to improve electrical contact.
6. Shielded cable for motor connection with shielding connected to ground at both ends.
The shielding must be continuous and intermediate terminals must be in EMC shielded metal boxes.
For 0.18 to 1.5 kW drives, if the switching frequency is higher than 12 kHz, use cables with low linear capacitance: max. 130 pF
(picoFarads) per meter.
7. Shielded cable for connecting the control/signalling wiring.
For applications requiring several conductors, use cables with a small cross-section (0.5 mm2, 20 AWG).
The shielding must be connected to ground at both ends. The shielding must be continuous and intermediate terminals must be in EMC
shielded metal boxes.
8. Shielded cable for connecting braking resistor (if used).
The shielding must be continuous and intermediate terminals must be in EMC shielded metal boxes.
Note:
• If using an additional input filter, it should be mounted under the drive and connected directly to the line supply via an unshielded
cable. Link 3 on the drive is then via the filter output cable.
• The HF equipotential ground connection between the drive, motor and cable shielding does not remove the need to connect the PE
ground conductors (green-yellow) to the appropriate terminals on each unit.
31
Wiring (continued)
Operation on an IT system
IT system: Isolated or impedance earthed neutral.
8I64S2*****.00X-1 and 8I64T4*****.00X-1 drives have a built-in EMC filter. As a result they exhibit leakage current to ground. If the leakage
current creates compatibility problems with your installation (residual current device or other), then you can reduce the leakage current by
opening the IT jumper. In this configuration EMC compliance is not guaranteed.
Use a permanent insulation monitor compatible with non-linear loads.
8I64S200018.00X-1 to 8I64S200220.00X-1 and 8I64T400037.00X-1 to 8I64T400400.00X-1:
Pull out the jumper on the left of the ground terminal as illustrated below.
Normal
(filter connected)
IT system
(filter
disconnected)
8I64T400550.00X-1 to 8I64T401500.00X-1:
Move the cable tag on the top left of the power terminals as illustrated below (example: 8I64T400550.00X-1):
IT system
(filter disconnected)
Normal
(filter connected)
(factory setting)
32
Check list
Read carefully the safety information in programming and installation manuals and the catalogue. Before starting up the drive, please check
the following points regarding mechanical and electrical installations, then use and run the drive.
For complete documentation, refer to www.br-automation.com.
1. Mechanical installation
• For drive mounting types and recommendations on the ambient temperature (see the Mounting instructions on page 15).
• Mount the drive vertically as specified (see the Mounting instructions on page 15).
• The use of the drive must be in agreement with the environments defined by the standard 60721-3-3 and according to the levels
defined in the catalogue.
• Mount the options required for your application (see catalogue).
2. Electrical installation
• Connect the drive to the ground (see Equipment Grounding on page 18).
• Ensure that the input power voltage corresponds to the drive nominal voltage and connect the line supply as shown on the drawing
on page 19.
• Ensure to use appropriate input power fuses and circuit breaker.
• Wire the control terminals as required (see Control terminals on page 25). Separate the power cable and the control cable according
to EMC compatibility rules.
• The range 8I64S2*****.00X-1 and 8I64T4*****.00X-1 integrates EMC filter. The leakage current can be reduced using the IT jumper
as explained in the paragraph Operating on an IT system on page 32.
• Ensure that motor connections correspond to the voltage (star, delta).
3. Use and run the drive (see programming manual)
• Start the drive and you will see [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) at the first power on. Check that the frequency defined by the frequency
bFr (the factory setting is 50 Hz) is in accordance with the frequency of the motor.
• On first power-up parameters [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) and [2/3 wire control] (tCC) appear after bFr. These parameters should be set
if you want to control the drive locally, see page «How to control the drive locally» in the programming manual.
• On subsequent power-up, rdY will be displayed on the HMI.
• The [Restore config.] (FCS) function, permits you to reset the drive with factory settings.
33
Maintenance
Servicing
The ACOPOSinverter X64 does not require any preventive maintenance. However, it is advisable to perform the following checks regularly:
• The condition and tightness of connections.
• Ensure that the temperature around the unit remains at an acceptable level and that ventilation is effective. Average service life of
fans: 10 years.
• Remove any dust from the drive.
• Ensure proper fan operation.
• Physical damage to covers.
Assistance with maintenance, detected fault display
If a problem arises during setup or operation, ensure that the recommendations relating to the environment, mounting and connections have
been observed.
The first fault detected is stored and displayed, flashing, on the screen.
Clearing the detected fault
Disconnect the drive power supply in the event of a non-resettable fault.
Wait for the display to go off completely.
Find the cause of the detected fault and correct it.
Restore power to the drive.
The detected fault will no longer be present if it's cause has been corrected.
In the event of a non resettable detected fault:
- Remove/cut the power to the drive.
- WAIT 15 MINUTES to allow the DC bus capacitors to discharge. Then follow the “DC bus voltage measurement procedure”
page 17 to verify that the DC voltage is less than 42 V. The drive LEDs are not indicators of the absence of DC bus voltage.
- Find and correct the detected fault.
- Restore power to the drive to confirm the detected fault has been rectified.
Certain detected faults can be programmed for automatic restart after the cause has disappeared.
These detected faults can also be reset by cycling power to the drive or by means of a logic input or control bit.
Display menu
Use the display menu to show the status of the drive and it's current values as an aid for finding the causes of detected faults.
Spares and repairs
Serviceable product: replacement of spares following the catalog.
Procedure after a long time storage
WARNING
RISK OF EXPLOSION AT THE POWER UP
The capacitors after a long time storage can have issues. Following a storage time between 2 and 3 years:
• Use one AC supply variable connected between L1, L2 and L3
• Increase AC supply voltage to have:
- 25% of rated voltage during 30min
- 50% of rated voltage during 30min
- 75% of rated voltage during 30min
- 100% of rated voltage during 30min
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
34
Short-circuit rating and branch circuit protection
Recommended fuse ratings for UL and CSA requirements
Reference
Voltage
(Y)
Input
withstand
rating (1)
Output
interrupt
rating (X)(2)
8I64S200018.00X-1
8I64S200037.00X-1
8I64S200055.00X-1
8I64S200075.00X-1
8I64S200110.00X-1
8I64S200150.00X-1
8I64S200220.00X-1
8I64T200018.00X-1
8I64T200037.00X-1
8I64T200055.00X-1
8I64T200075.00X-1
8I64T200110.00X-1
8I64T200150.00X-1
8I64T200220.00X-1
8I64T200300.00X-1
8I64T200400.00X-1
8I64T200550.00X-1
8I64T200750.00X-1
8I64T201100.00X-1
8I64T201500.00X-1
8I64T400037.00X-1
8I64T400055.00X-1
8I64T400075.00X-1
8I64T400110.00X-1
8I64T400150.00X-1
8I64T400220.00X-1
8I64T400300.00X-1
8I64T400400.00X-1
8I64T400550.00X-1
8I64T400750.00X-1
8I64T401100.00X-1
8I64T401500.00X-1
200-240
200-240
200-240
200-240
200-240
200-240
200-240
200-240
200-240
200-240
200-240
200-240
200-240
200-240
200-240
200-240
200-240
200-240
200-240
200-240
380-500
380-500
380-500
380-500
380-500
380-500
380-500
380-500
380-500
380-500
380-500
380-500
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
22
22
22
22
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
Enclosure
Containment
rating (3)
(Type 1)
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Branch
Circuit
protection
(Z1)
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Class J Fuse
Rating
(Z2)
6
10
10
15
20
20
30
3
6
10
10
15
15
20
25
35
50
60
80
110
3
6
6
10
10
15
15
20
30
35
50
70
Suitable For Use On A Circuit Capable Of Delivering Not More Than ___X____ rms Symmetrical Amperes, ___Y____ Volts Maximum,
When Protected by __Z 1____ with a Maximum rating of__Z 2___.
(1) Input withstand rating is that for which the product has been designed thermally. Installation on a supply greater than this level will require
additional inductance to satisfy this level.
(2) Output interrupt rating relies on Integral solid state short circuit protection. This does not provide branch circuit protection. Branch circuit
protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any additional local codes. This is dependant on the type
of installation.
(3) Enclosure Containment Rating is the maximum input short-circuit current at the drive input terminals with the specific branch Circuit
Protection present for which any internal component breakdown, will not create a shock, flame, fire or expulsion hazard outside a specific
enclosure structure. The various combinations are indicated in supplementary documents.
35
2354235 11/2008
ACOPOSinverter X64
Variable speed drives for
asynchronous motors
Programming Manual
Version:
Model number:
0.20 (April 2011)
MAxxxxxxx-ENG
All information contained in this manual is current as of its creation/publication. We reserve the right to change the contents of this manual
without warning. The information contained herein is believed to be accurate as of the date of publication; however, Bernecker + Rainer
Industrie-Elektronik Ges.m.b.H. makes no warranty, expressed or implied, with regard to the products or the documentation contained
within this book. In addition, Bernecker + Rainer Industrie-Elektronik Ges.m.b.H. shall not be liable in the event of incidental or
consequential damages in connection with or resulting from the furnishing, performance, or use of these products. The software names,
hardware names, and trademarks used in this document are registered by the respective companies.
Table of Contents
Manual history.............................................................................................................................................................. 4
Important information ................................................................................................................................................... 5
Before you begin .......................................................................................................................................................... 6
Steps for setting up the drive ....................................................................................................................................... 8
Setup - Preliminary Recommendations........................................................................................................................ 9
Factory configuration.................................................................................................................................................. 10
Basic functions ........................................................................................................................................................... 11
Graphic display terminal............................................................................................................................................. 13
Structure of the parameter tables............................................................................................................................... 17
Compatibility of functions ........................................................................................................................................... 18
List of functions that can be assigned to inputs/outputs............................................................................................. 20
List of functions that can be assigned to the Network control word bits..................................................................... 22
Checklist..................................................................................................................................................................... 23
Programming.............................................................................................................................................................. 24
[SPEED REFERENCE] (rEF-) menu ......................................................................................................................... 28
[SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu........................................................................................................................................... 29
[MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu ............................................................................................................................. 38
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I_O-) menu ................................................................................................................... 44
[COMMAND] (CtL-) menu .......................................................................................................................................... 47
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu ...................................................................................................................... 59
[FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-) menu ....................................................................................................................... 87
[COMMUNICATION] (COM-) menu ........................................................................................................................... 94
[MONITORING] (SUP-) menu.................................................................................................................................... 96
Diagnostics and troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................. 101
Index of functions ..................................................................................................................................................... 105
Index of parameter codes and customer settings .................................................................................................... 106
3
Manual history
Version
0.20
April 2011
0.12
December 2010
Chapter: [INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I_O-) menu: added caution block
0.11
December 2010
Editorial modifications
0.10
4
Date
Comment
June 2009
• Various adaptions concerning applicable I/Os
• Modifications of descriptions
First edition
Important information
NOTICE
Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before trying to install, operate, or maintain
it. The following special messages may appear throughout this documentation or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call
attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure.
The addition of this symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label indicates that an electrical hazard exists, which will result in
personal injury if the instructions are not followed.
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow
this symbol to avoid possible injury or death.
DANGER
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death, serious injury or
equipment damage.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can result in death, serious injury or
equipment damage.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can result in injury or equipment damage.
CAUTION
CAUTION, used without the safety alert symbol, indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can
result in equipment damage.
PLEASE NOTE
The word " drive " as used in this manual refers to the " controller portion " of the adjustable speed drive as defined by NEC.
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by
B & R for any consequences arising out of the use of this documentation.
5
Before you begin
Read and understand these instructions before performing any procedure with this drive.
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
• Read and understand this manual before installing or operating the ACOPOSinverter X64 drive. Installation, adjustment, repair,
and maintenance must be performed by qualified personnel.
• The user is responsible for compliance with all international and national electrical code requirements with respect to grounding of
all equipment.
• Many parts of this drive, including the printed circuit boards, operate at the line voltage. DO NOT TOUCH. Use only electrically
insulated tools.
• DO NOT touch unshielded components or terminal strip screw connections with voltage present.
• DO NOT short across terminals PA/+ and PC/– or across the DC bus capacitors.
• Before repairing the variable speed drive:
- Disconnect all power, including external control power that may be present.
- Place a “DO NOT TURN ON” label on all power disconnects.
- Lock all power disconnects in the open position.
- WAIT 15 MINUTES to allow the DC bus capacitors to discharge.
- Measure the voltage of the DC bus between the PA/+ and PC/– terminals to ensure that the voltage is less than 42 Vdc.
- If the DC bus capacitors do not discharge completely, contact your local B & R office. Do not repair or operate the drive.
• Install and close all covers before applying power or starting and stopping the drive.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• Read and understand this manual before installing or operating the ACOPOSinverter X64 drive.
• Any changes made to the parameter settings must be performed by qualified personnel.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
DAMAGED EQUIPMENT
Do not install or operate any drive that appears damaged.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
6
Before you begin
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
• The designer of any wiring diagram must take account of potential control channel failure modes and, for certain critical control
functions, incorporate a way of achieving a safe state during and after a channel failure. Examples of critical control functions are
emergency stop and overtravel stop.
• Separate or redundant control channels must be provided for critical control functions.
• System control paths may include communication links. Consideration must be given to the implications of unanticipated transmission
delays or failures of the link. a
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
a) For additional information, refer to NEMA ICS 1.1 (latest edition), " Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of
Solid State Control " and to NEMA ICS 7.1 (latest edition), " Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation and
Operation of Adjustable-Speed Drive Systems " .
7
Steps for setting up the drive
INSTALLATION
1. Please refer to the Installation Manual.
PROGRAMMING
2. Apply input power to the drive, but do not
give a run command.
3. Configure:
v The
Tips:
• Before beginning programming, complete the customer
setting tables, page 106.
• Use the [Restore config.] (FCS) parameter, page 43,
to return to the factory settings at any time.
• To locate the description of a function quickly, use the index
of functions on page 105.
• Before configuring a function, read carefully the " Function
compatibility " section on pages 18 and 19.
• Note:
The following operations must be performed for optimum
drive performance in terms of accuracy and response time:
- Enter the values indicated on the (motor) rating plate in
the [MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu, page 38.
- Perform auto-tuning with the motor cold and connected
using the [Auto-tuning] (tun) parameter, page 40.
- Adjust the [FreqLoopGain] (FLG) parameter, page 30
and the [Fr.Loop.Stab] (StA) parameter, page 31.
nominal frequency of the motor
[Standard mot. freq] (bFr) page 38 if this is
not 50 Hz,
v The motor parameters in the [MOTOR
CONTROL] (drC-) menu, page 38, only if
the factory configuration of the drive is
not suitable,
v The application functions in the
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I_O-) menu,
page 44, the [COMMAND] (CtL-) menu,
page 47, and the [APPLICATION
FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu, page 59, only if
the factory configuration of the drive
is not suitable.
4. In the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu,
adjust the following
parameters:
v [Acceleration] (ACC), page 29 and
[Deceleration], (dEC) page 29,
v [Low speed] (LSP), page 30 and [High
speed] (HSP), page 30,
v [Mot. therm. current] (ItH), page 30.
5. Start the drive.
8
Setup - Preliminary Recommendations
Before powering up the drive
DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Make sure that all logic inputs are inactive to avoid any unintended operation.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
Before configuring the drive
DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• Read and understand this manual before installing or operating the ACOPOSinverter X64 drive.
• Any changes made to the parameter settings must be performed by qualified personnel.
• Make sure that all logic inputs are inactive to avoid any unintended operation when parameters are being changed.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
Start-up
Note: When factory settings apply and during power-up/manual reset or after a stop command, the motor can only be powered once the
" forward " , " reverse " and " DC injection stop " commands have been reset. If they have not been reset, the drive will display [Freewheel stop]
(nSt) but will not start. If the automatic restart function has been configured ([Automatic restart] (Atr) parameter in the [FAULT
MANAGEMENT] (FLt-) menu, page 87), these commands are taken into account without a reset (to zero) being necessary.
Line contactor
CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO DRIVE
• Frequent use of the contactor will cause premature ageing of the filter capacitors.
• Do not have cycle times less than 60 seconds.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Using a motor with a lower rating or dispensing with a motor altogether
• With the factory settings, motor output phase loss detection is active ([Output Phase Loss] (OPL) = [YES] (YES), page 90). To avoid
having to use a motor with the same rating as the drive when testing the drive or during a maintenance phase, deactivate motor output
phase loss detection ([Output Phase Loss] (OPL) = [No] (nO)). This can prove particularly useful if very powerful drives are being
used.
• Set the [U/F mot 1 selected] (UFt) parameter, page 41, on [Cst. torque] (L) in the [MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu.
CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO MOTOR
Motor thermal protection will not be provided by the drive if the motor's nominal current is 20% lower than that of the drive. Find an
alternative source of thermal protection.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
9
Factory configuration
Factory settings
The ACOPOSinverter X64 is factory-set for the most common operating conditions:
• Display: drive ready [Ready] (rdY) with motor stopped, and motor frequency with motor running.
• The AI3 analog input and R2 relay are unaffected.
• Stop mode when fault detected: freewheel
When using X2X, the following settings are changed automatically:
LAC, Fr1, Cd1, Cd2, FLOC, SA2, COd, PS2, PS4
Depending on the material number the following numbers of I/Os are available:
• 8I64*******.00X-1: LI1 to LI4, R2, dO
• 8I64*******.00C-1: LI1 to LI3, AI2, AI3, R2
Code
Description
Value
Page
bFr
[Standard mot. freq]
[50Hz IEC]
38
tCC
[2/3 wire control]
[2 wire] (2C): 2-wire control
27
UFt
[U/F mot 1 selected]
[SVC] (n): Sensorless flux vector control for constant torque applications
41
ACC
DEC
[Acceleration]
[Deceleration]
3.00 seconds
60
LSP
[Low speed]
0 Hz
30
HSP
[High speed]
50 Hz
30
ItH
[Mot. therm. current]
Nominal motor current (value depending on drive rating)
30
SdC1
[Auto DC inj. level 1]
0.7 x nominal drive current, for 0.5 seconds
32
SFr
[Switching freq.]
4 kHz
37
rrS
[Reverse assign.]
[LI2] (LI2): Logic input LI2
45
PS2
[2 preset speeds]
[LI3] (LI3): Logic input LI3
69
PS4
[4 preset speeds]
[LI4] (LI4): Logic input LI4
69
Fr1
[Ref.1 channel]
[AI1] (AI1): Not applicable
26
SA2
[Summing ref. 2]
[AI2] (AI2): Analog input AI2
67
r1
[R1 Assignment]
[No drive flt] (FLt): Not applicable
46
brA
[Dec ramp adapt.]
[Yes] (YES): Function active (automatic adaptation of deceleration ramp)
61
Atr
[Automatic restart]
[No] (nO): Function inactive
87
Stt
[Type of stop]
[Ramp stop] (rMP): On ramp
62
CFG
[Macro configuration]
[Factory set.] (Std) (1)
42
Check whether the values above are compatible with the application. If necessary, the drive can be used without changing the settings.
(1) If you want to keep the drive's presettings to a minimum, select the macro configuration [Macro configuration] (CFG) = [Start/stop] (StS)
followed by [Restore config.] (FCS) = [Config. CFG] (InI) (page 43).
The [Start/stop] (StS) macro configuration is the same as the factory configuration, apart from the I/O assignment:
• Logic inputs:
- LI1, LI2 (reversing): 2-wire transition detection control, LI1 = run forward, LI2 = run reverse
- LI3 to LI4: Inactive (not assigned)
• Analog inputs:
- AI1: Not applicable
- AI2, AI3: Inactive (not assigned)
• Relay R1: Not applicable
• Relay R2: Inactive (not assigned)
• Analog output AOC: Not applicable
10
Basic functions
Drive thermal protection
Functions:
Thermal protection by PTC probe fitted on the heatsink or integrated in the power module.
Indirect protection of the drive against overloads by tripping in the event of an overcurrent. Typical tripping values:
- Motor current = 185% of nominal drive current: 2 seconds
- Motor current = 150% of nominal drive current: 60 seconds
Time
(seconds)
Motor current/In drive
Drive ventilation
The fan starts up when the drive is powered up then shuts down after 10 seconds if a run command has not been received.
The fan is powered automatically when the drive is unlocked (direction of operation + reference). It is powered down a few seconds after
the drive is locked (motor speed & lt; 0.2 Hz and injection braking completed).
11
Basic functions
Motor thermal protection
Function:
Thermal protection by calculating the I2t.
The protection takes account of self-cooled motors.
Tripping time t
in seconds
Motor current/
[Mot. therm. current] (ItH)
CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO MOTOR
External protection against overloads is required under the following circumstances:
• When the product is being switched on again, as there is no memory to record the motor thermal state
• When supplying more than one motor
• When supplying motors with ratings less than 0.2 times the nominal drive current
• When using motor switching
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
12
Graphic display terminal
Although the graphic display terminal is optional (see catalog). The graphic display terminal can be disconnected and connected remotely
(on the door of an enclosure for example) using the cables and accessories available as options (see catalog).
Description of terminal
1 Graphic display
2 Function keys:
F1: CODE
F2, F3: not used
F4: MODE
7 ESC key: Aborts a value, a
parameter or a menu to return
to the previous selection
3 STOP/RESET
button
6 Button for reversing the direction
of rotation of the motor
4 RUN button
5 Navigation button:
• Press (ENT):
- To save the current value
- To enter the selected menu or parameter
• Turn CW/
CCW:
- To increment or decrement a value
- To go to the next or previous line
- To increase or decrease the reference if control via
the terminal is activated
Note: Buttons 3, 4, 5 and 6 can be used to control the drive directly, if control via the terminal is activated.
To activate the buttons on the remote display terminal, you first have to configure [HMI command] (LCC) = [Yes] (YES), page 58.
13
Graphic display terminal
Powering up the graphic display terminal for the first time
Note: When the ACOPOSinverter X64 gets configured with the Automation Studio, the display is locked per default setting.
Under monitoring (pin code 1), the display could get unlocked with the entered code in the Automation Studio (default 64).
When powering up the graphic display terminal for the first time, the user has to select the required language.
LANGUAGE
English
Français
Deutsch
Espanol
Italiano
Display after the graphic display terminal has been
powered up for the first time.
Select the language and press ENT.
Chinese
Russian
Turkish
The drive's rating details will now appear.
8I64S200220.00X-1
2.2kW/3HP 200/240V
Config. n°1
MAIN MENU
DRIVE MENU
LANGUAGE
The [MAIN MENU]
follows automatically.
3 seconds
or ENT
DRIVE MENU
SPEED REFERENCE
SETTINGS
MOTOR CONTROL
INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG
COMMAND
Code
APPLICATION FUNCT.
FAULT MANAGEMENT
COMMUNICATION
14
Automatically switches to the [DRIVE MENU]
menu after 3 seconds.
Select the menu and press ENT.
Mode
Graphic display terminal
Powering up the drive for the first time
When powering up the drive for the first time, the user immediately accesses the 3 parameters below: [Standard mot. freq] (bFr), [Ref.1
channel] (Fr1), and [2/3 wire control] (tCC), page 27.
8I64S200220.00X-1
Display after the drive has been powered up for the
first time.
2.2kW/3HP 200/240V
Config. n°1
MAIN MENU
DRIVE MENU
LANGUAGE
The [MAIN MENU]
follows automatically.
3 seconds
Automatically switches to the [DRIVE MENU]
menu after 3 seconds.
Select the menu and press ENT.
DRIVE MENU
Standard mot. freq
2/3 wire control
Ref.1 channel
SPEED REFERENCE
SETTINGS
MOTOR CONTROL
INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG
COMMAND
APPLICATION FUNCT.
FAULT MANAGEMENT
COMMUNICATION
ESC
The word " Ready " appears on the graphic display
terminal if you press the ESC key when in the
[DRIVE MENU].
DRIVE MENU
Ready
Code
Mode
15
Graphic display terminal
Subsequent power-ups
Display after powering up.
8I64S200220.00X-1
2.2kW/3HP 200/240V
Config. n°1
MAIN MENU
DRIVE MENU
LANGUAGE
The [MAIN MENU]
follows automatically.
3 seconds
DRIVE MENU
SPEED REFERENCE
SETTINGS
MOTOR CONTROL
INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG
COMMAND
Code
APPLICATION FUNCT.
FAULT MANAGEMENT
COMMUNICATION
Automatically switches to the [DRIVE MENU]
menu after 3 seconds.
Select the menu and press ENT.
Mode
ESC
The word " Ready " appears on the graphic display
terminal if you press the ESC key when in the
[DRIVE MENU].
DRIVE MENU
Ready
Code
16
Mode
Structure of the parameter tables
The parameter tables contained in the descriptions of the various menus are organized as follows.
Example :
5
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] menu (Fun-)
1
Code
2
PI-
6
Name/Description
b
Adjustment
range
Factory
setting
[PI regulator]
Note: The " PI regulator " function is incompatible with several functions (see page 18). It can only
be configured if these functions are unassigned, in particular the summing inputs (set [Summing
ref. 2] (SA2) to [No] (nO), page 67) and the preset speeds (set [2 preset speeds] (PS2) and
[4 preset speeds] (PS4) to [No] (nO), page 69) which will have been assigned as part of the
factory settings.
3
PIF
4
no
AI1
A12
A13
M [PID feedback ass.]
v [Non] (nO): not assigned
v [AI1] (AI1): not applicable
v [AI2] (AI2): analog input AI2
v [AI3] (AI3): analog input AI3
7
[Non] (nO)
8
1. Name of menu on 4-digit 7-segment display
2. Submenu code on 4-digit 7-segment display
3. Parameter code on 4-digit 7-segment display
4. Parameter value on 4-digit 7-segment display
5. Name of menu in B & R Automation Studio and graphic display
terminal
6. Name of submenu in B & R Automation Studio and graphic
display terminal
7. Name of parameter in B & R Automation Studio and graphic
display terminal
8. Value of parameter in B & R Automation Studio and graphic
display terminal
17
Compatibility of functions
Incompatible functions
The following functions will be inaccessible or deactivated in the cases described below:
Automatic restart
This is only possible for the 2-wire level control type ([2/3 wire control] (tCC) = [2 wire] (2C) and [2 wire type] (tCt) = [Level] (LEL) or
[Fwd priority] (PFO)).
Catch on the fly
This is only possible for the 2-wire level control type ([2/3 wire control] (tCC) = [2 wire] (2C) and [2 wire type] (tCt) = [Level] (LEL) or
[Fwd priority] (PFO)).
This function is locked if automatic standstill injection has been configured as DC ([Auto DC injection] (AdC) = [Continuous] (Ct)).
Function compatibility table
The choice of application functions may be limited by the number of I/O and by the fact that some functions are incompatible with one
another. Functions which are not listed in this table are compatible.
If there is an incompatibility between functions, the first function configured will prevent the others being configured.
Management of limit switches
Freewheel stop
p
Fast stop
p
DC injection stop
A
Brake control
Jog operation
Management of limit switches
p
p
p
PI regulator
+/- speed (1)
A
p
Preset speeds (factory setting)
Summing inputs (factory setting)
+/- speed (1)
Summing inputs (factory setting)
To configure a function, first check that functions which are incompatible with it are unassigned, especially those which are
assigned in the factory settings.
p
Preset speeds (factory setting)
X
p
PI regulator
p
p
Jog operation
X
p
p
p
Brake control
p
X
A
p
p
p
p
p
p
DC injection stop
p
p
A
Fast stop
A
Freewheel stop
X
X
(1) Excluding special application with reference channel [Ref.2 channel] (Fr2) (see diagrams 50 and 52)
p
Incompatible functions
Compatible functions
Not applicable
Priority functions (functions which cannot be active at the same time):
The function marked with the arrow takes priority over the other.
X
A
Stop functions take priority over run commands.
Speed references via logic command take priority over analog references.
18
Compatibility of functions
Logic and analog input application functions
Each of the functions on the following pages can be assigned to one of the inputs.
A single input can activate several functions at the same time (reverse and 2nd ramp for example). The user must therefore ensure that
these functions can be used at the same time.
The [MONITORING] (SUP-) menu ([[LOGIC INPUT CONF.]] (LIA-) parameter, page 100, and [[ANALOG INPUTS IMAGE]] (AIA-)
parameter, page 100) can be used to display the functions assigned to each input in order to check their compatibility.
Before assigning a reference, command or function to a logic or analog input, the user must check that this input has not already been
assigned in the factory settings and that no other input has been assigned to an incompatible or unwanted function.
• Example of incompatible function to be unassigned:
In order to use the " +speed/-speed " function, the preset speeds and summing input 2 must first be unassigned.
The table below lists the factory-set input assignments and the procedure for unassigning them.
Assigned input
Function
Code
To unassign, set to:
Page
LI2
Run reverse
rrS
nO
45
LI3
2 preset speeds
PS2
nO
69
LI4
4 preset speeds
PS4
nO
69
AI1
not applicable
Fr1
not applicable
55
LI1
Run forward
tCC
2C or 3C
44
AI2
Summing input 2
SA2
nO
67
19
List of functions that can be assigned to inputs/outputs
Logic inputs
Run forward
Page
Code
Factory setting
-
-
LI1
2 preset speeds
69
PS2
LI3
4 preset speeds
69
PS4
LI4
8 preset speeds
69
PS8
16 preset speeds
70
PS16
2 preset PI references
77
Pr2
4 preset PI references
78
Pr4
+ speed
74
USP
- speed
74
dSP
Jog operation
72
JOG
Ramp switching
61
rPS
2nd current limit switching
82
LC2
Fast stop via logic input
62
FSt
DC injection via logic input
63
dCI
Freewheel stop via logic input
64
nSt
Run reverse
45
rrS
LI2
External fault
89
EtF
RESET
88
rSF
Forced local mode
95
FLO
Reference switching
56
rFC
Control channel switching
57
CCS
Motor switching
83
CHP
Forward limit switch
85
LAF
Reverse limit switch
85
LAr
Fault inhibition
92
InH
Analog inputs
Page
Code
Not assigned
-
-
AI3
Reference 1
55
Fr1
AI1
Reference 2
55
Fr2
Summing input 2
67
SA2
Summing input 3
67
SA3
PI regulator feedback
77
PIF
20
Factory setting
AI2
List of functions that can be assigned to inputs/outputs
Analog/logic output
Page
Code
Not assigned
-
-
Motor current
45
OCr
Motor frequency
45
OFr
Motor torque
45
Otr
Power supplied by the drive
45
OPr
Drive detected fault (logic data)
45
FLt
Drive running (logic data)
45
rUn
Frequency threshold reached (logic data)
45
FtA
High speed (HSP) reached (logic data)
45
FLA
Current threshold reached (logic data)
45
CtA
Frequency reference reached (logic data)
45
SrA
Motor thermal threshold reached (logic data)
45
tSA
Brake sequence (logic data)
45
bLC
Page
Factory setting
Code
Relay
dO
Factory setting
Not assigned
-
-
R2
Detected fault
46
FLt
R1
Drive running
46
rUn
Frequency threshold reached
46
FtA
High speed (HSP) reached
46
FLA
Current threshold reached
46
CtA
Frequency reference reached
46
SrA
Motor thermal threshold reached
46
tSA
Brake sequence
46
bLC
Copy of the logic input
46
LI1 to LI4
21
List of functions that can be assigned to the Network control word bits
Bits 11 to 15 of the control word
Page
Code
2 preset speeds
69
PS2
4 preset speeds
69
PS4
8 preset speeds
69
PS8
16 preset speeds
70
PS16
2 preset PI references
77
Pr2
4 preset PI references
78
Pr4
Ramp switching
61
rPS
2nd current limit switching
82
LC2
Fast stop via logic input
62
FSt
DC injection
63
dCI
External fault
89
EtF
Reference switching
56
rFC
Control channel switching
57
CCS
Motor switching
83
CHP
22
Checklist
Carefully read the information contained in the programming and installation manuals, as well as the information in the catalogue. Before
starting to use the drive, please check the following points relating to mechanical and electrical installations.
For the full range of documentation, please visit www.br-automation.com.
1. Mechanical installation (see installation manual)
• For details of the different installation types and recommendations concerning ambient temperature, please refer to the installation
instructions in the installation manual.
• Install the drive vertically in accordance with the specifications. Please refer to the installation instructions in the installation manual.
• When using the drive, both the environmental conditions defined under standard 60721-3-3 and the levels defined in the catalogue
must be respected.
• Install the required options for your application. Refer to the catalogue for details.
2. Electrical installation (see installation manual)
• Ground the drive. See the sections on how to ground equipment in the installation manual.
• Make sure the input supply voltage matches the nominal drive voltage and connect the line supply in accordance with the installation
manual.
• Make sure you use appropriate input line fuses and circuit breakers. See installation manual.
• Arrange the cables for the control terminals as required (see installation manual). Separate the supply and control cables in
accordance with EMC compatibility rules.
• The 8I64S2*****.00X-1 and 8I64T4*****.00X-1 ranges include an EMC filter Using an IT jumper helps reduce leakage current. This is
explained in the paragraph about the internal EMC filter on the 8I64S2*****.00X-1 and the 8I64T4*****.00X-1 in the installation
manual.
• Make sure the motor connections are right for the voltage (star, delta).
3. Using and starting up the drive
• Start the drive. [Standard mot. freq] (bFr), page 26, is displayed the first time the drive is powered up. Make sure the frequency defined
by frequency bFr (the factory setting is 50 Hz) matches the motor's frequency.
• When the drive is powered up for the first time, the [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) parameter, page 26, and the [2/3 wire control] (tCC)
parameter, page 27, are displayed after [Standard mot. freq] (bFr). These parameters will need to be adjusted if you wish to control
the drive locally.
• When the drive is powered up subsequently, [Ready] (rdY) is displayed on the HMI.
• The [Restore config.] (FCS) function, page 43, is used to reinitialize the drive with the factory settings.
23
Programming
Description of the HMI
Functions of the display and the keys
• 4 x 7 segment display
• REF LED, illuminated if
[SPEED REFERENCE]
(rEF-) menu is active
• Status LEDs of integrated
communication interface
• Load LED
• Used to quit a menu or parameter
or to clear the value displayed in
order to revert to the value in the
memory.
• In LOCAL configuration, 2s
press on ESC button switches
between the control/
programming modes
• MON LED, illuminated if
[MONITORING] (SUP-)
menu is active.
• CONF LED, illuminated if the
[SETTINGS] (SEt-),
[MOTOR CONTROL]
(drC-),[INPUTS / OUTPUTS
CFG] (I_O-), [COMMAND]
(CtL-), [APPLICATION
FUNCT] (FUn-), [FAULT
MANAGEMENT] (FLt-)
or [COMMUNICATION]
(COM-) menus are active.
• MODE button (1): 3s
press on MODE button
switches between the
REMOTE/LOCAL
configurations. If [SPEED
REFERENCE] (rEF-) is
displayed, this will take
you to the [SETTINGS]
(SEt-) menu. If not, it will
take you to the [SPEED
REFERENCE] (rEF-)
menu.
• Jog dial - can be used for
navigation by turning it clockwise
or counter-clockwise - pressing
the jog dial enables the user to
make a selection or confirm
information.
• RUN button: Controls powering up
of the motor for forward running in
LOCAL configuration and in
REMOTE configuration if the [2/3
wire control] (tCC) parameter in
the [INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]
(I_O-) menu is set to [Local] (LOC),
page 44. (could be hidden by door
if function disabled)
Functions as a potentiometer in
LOCAL configuration and in REMOTE
configuration if [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1-)
in the [COMMAND] (CtL-) menu is set
to [Image input AIV1] (AIV1).
STOP/RESET button
• Enables detected fault to be reset
• Can be used to control motor stopping
- If [2/3 wire control] (tCC) is not set to
[Local] (LOC), freewheel stop
- If [2/3 wire control] (tCC) is set to [Local]
(LOC), stop on ramp or freewheel stop
during DC injection braking.
Note 1: In LOCAL configuration, the three LEDs REF, MON and CONF are blinking simultaneously in programming mode and are working
as a LED chaser in control mode.
Normal display, with no fault code displayed and no startup:
-
-
: Displays the parameter selected in the [MONITORING] (SUP-) menu (default: motor frequency).
If the current is limited, the display flashes. In such cases, CLI will appear at the top left if a graphic display terminal is connected
to the drive.
InIt: Initialization sequence
rdY: Drive ready
dCb: DC injection braking in progress
nSt: Freewheel stop
FSt: Fast stop
tUn : Auto-tuning in progress
In the event of a detected fault, the display will flash to notify the user accordingly. If a graphic display terminal is connected, the
name of the detected fault will be displayed.
(1) If the drive is locked by a code ([PIN code 1] (COd), page 99), pressing the Mode key enables you to switch from the [MONITORING]
(SUP-) menu to the [SPEED REFERENCE] (rEF-) menu and vice versa. It is no longer possible to switch between LOCAL and REMOTE
configurations.
24
Programming
REMOTE and LOCAL configuration
The LOCAL configuration allows to activate automatically the embedded RUN button and the jog dial as a potentiometer.
In that configuration, the speed adjustment will also be effective on remote keypads. MODE button on the remote display terminal and
on the graphic display terminal (function key F4) is also active to switch from one configuration to another.
[Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) is set to [AI Virtual 1] (AIV1) and [2/3 wire control] (tCC) are set to [2 wire] (2C) when switching to LOCAL
configuration.
For parameters interdependencies reasons, switching from one configuration to another will change other parameters (for example : Input/
Output assignment will return to their factory value).
Choose the configuration (REMOTE or LOCAL) before starting the parameters adjustment of the drive.
Structure of the menus
On the 7-segment display, a dash after menu and submenu codes is used to differentiate them from parameter codes.
Examples: [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu, [Acceleration] (ACC) parameter
25
Programming
Configuring the [Standard mot. freq] (bFr), [2/3 wire control] (tCC), and
[Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) parameters
These parameters can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present.
Code
Description
M [Standard mot. freq]
bFr
Fr1
AI1
AI2
AI3
AIU1
Factory
setting
[50Hz IEC] (50)
This parameter is only visible the first time the drive is powered up.
It can be modified at any time in the [MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu.
[50Hz IEC] (50): 50 Hz
[60Hz NEMA] (60): 60 Hz
This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters: [High speed] (HSP), page 30, [Freq.
threshold] (Ftd), page 36, [Rated motor freq.] (FrS), page 38, and [Max frequency] (tFr), page 41
50
60
M [Ref.1 channel]
v [AI1] (AI1) - Not applicable
v [AI2] (AI2) - Analog input AI2
v [AI3] (AI3) - Analog input AI3
v [AI Virtual 1] (AIV1) - In terminal control mode, the jog dial functions as a potentiometer.
UPdt
UPdH
v
v
LCC
v
Mdb
nEt
v
v
[AI1] (AI1) (1)
If [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 2] (L2) or [Level 3] (L3), the following additional assignments are possible:
[+/- SPEED] (UPdt): +/- speed reference via LI. See configuration page 74.
[+/-spd HMI] (UPdH): +/- speed reference by turning the jog dial on the ACOPOSinverter X64 keypad.
To use, display the frequency [Output frequency] (rFr), page 97. The +/- speed function via the keypad or the
terminal is controlled from the [MONITORING] (SUP-) menu by selecting the [Output frequency] (rFr)
parameter.
If [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 3] (L3), the following additional assignments are possible:
[HMI] (LCC): reference via the remote display terminal, [HMI Frequency ref.] (LFr) parameter in the
[SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu, page 28.
[Modbus] (Mdb): Not applicable
[Com. card] (nEt): Reference via integrated communication interface
(1) When using X2X, the factory setting is changed automatically to [Com. card] (nEt).
26
Adjustment
range
Programming
Code
tCC
Description
Adjustment
range
Factory
setting
[2 wire] (2C)
M [2/3 wire control]
DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
When the [2/3 wire control] (tCC) parameter is changed, the [Reverse assign.] (rrS) parameter,
page 45, and the [2 wire type] (tCt) parameter, page 44, and all the assignments involving the
logic inputs will revert to their default values.
Check that this change is compatible with the wiring diagram used.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
2C
3C
LOC
v
v
v
Control configuration:
[2 wire] (2C): 2-wire control
[3 wire] (3C): 3-wire control
[Local] (LOC): Local control (RUN/STOP/RESET drive) (invisible if [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 3] (L3),
page 55)
2-wire control: The open or closed state of the input controls running or stopping.
Wiring example:
LI1: Forward
LIx: Reverse
2s
3-wire control (pulse control): A " forward " or " reverse " pulse is sufficient to control startup, a " stop " pulse is
sufficient to control stopping.
Wiring example:
LI1: Stop
LI2: Forward
LIx: Reverse
2s
The jog dial (ENT) needs to be pressed and held down (for 2 s) to change the assignment for this parameter.
27
[SPEED REFERENCE] (rEF-) menu
rEFSEt-
The [SPEED REFERENCE] (rEF-) menu displays [HMI Frequency ref.] (LFr), [Image input AIV1] (AIV1) or [Frequency ref.] (FrH) depending
on which control channel is active.
drCI_O-
During local control, the HMI's jog dial functions as a potentiometer, making it possible to increase or reduce the reference value within
limits defined by the [Low speed] (LSP) and [High speed] (HSP) parameters.
CtLFUn-
When local control is deactivated, by the [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) parameter, only the reference values are displayed. The value will be readonly and can only be changed via the jog dial (the speed reference is supplied by an AI or another source).
FLtCOM-
The reference displayed will depend on how the drive has been configured.
Code
SUP-
LFr
Description
M [HMI Frequency ref.]
Adjustment range
0 to 500 Hz
This parameter only appears if the function has been enabled.
It is used to change the speed reference from the remote control.
ENT does not have to be pressed to enable a change of reference.
AIU1
M [Image input AIV1]
0 to 100%
Used to amend the speed reference via the jog dial
FrH
M [Frequency ref.]
LSP to HSP Hz
This parameter is read-only. It enables you to display the speed reference applied to the motor, regardless of
which reference channel has been selected.
28
[SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu
rEFSEtdrCI_OCtLFUnFLtCOMSUP-
Scaling factor for the [Cust. output value] (SPd1) parameter
The adjustment parameters can be modified with the drive running or stopped.
Note: Changes should preferably be made with the drive stopped.
Code
LFr
g
rPI
g
ACC
Description
M [HMI Frequency ref.]
Adjustment range
Factory setting
0 to HSP
-
This parameter is displayed if [HMI command] (LCC) = [Yes] (YES), page 58 or if [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1)/[Ref.2
channel] (Fr2) = [HMI] (LCC) page 55, and if a remote display terminal is connected. In such cases, [HMI
Frequency ref.] (LFr) can also be accessed via the drive's keypad.
[HMI Frequency ref.] (LFr) is reinitialized to 0 when power is switched off.
M [Internal PID ref.]
0.0 to 100%
0%
Parameter is only visible if [PID feedback ass.] (PIF) is not set to [No] (nO), page 77.
M [Acceleration]
In accordance with
Inr, page 60
3s
Defined to accelerate from 0 to the nominal frequency [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) in the [MOTOR CONTROL]
(drC-) menu.
AC2
g
dE2
g
dEC
M [Acceleration 2]
In accordance with
Inr, page 60
5s
Parameter can be accessed if [Ramp 2 threshold] (Frt) & gt; 0, page 61, or if [Ramp switch ass.] (rPS) is assigned,
page 61.
M [Deceleration 2]
In accordance with
Inr, page 60
5s
Parameter can be accessed if [Ramp 2 threshold] (Frt) & gt; 0, page 61, or if [Ramp switch ass.] (rPS) is assigned,
page 61.
M [Deceleration]
In accordance with
Inr, page 60
3s
Defined to decelerate from the nominal frequency [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) (parameter in the [MOTOR CONTROL]
(drC-)) menu to 0.
Check that the value for [Deceleration] (dEC) is not too low in relation to the load to be stopped.
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
29
[SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu
rEFSEt-
Code
Description
Adjustment
range
0 to 100
drCI_O-
tA1
CtL-
g
FUnFLt-
tA2
COM-
g
SUP-
tA3
g
tA4
g
LSP
M [Begin Acc round]
Factory
setting
10
Parameter can be accessed if the [Ramp type] (rPt) = [Customized] (CUS), page 59.
M [End Acc round]
0 to (100-tA1)
10
Parameter can be accessed if the [Ramp type] (rPt) = [Customized] (CUS), page 59.
M [Begin Dec round]
0 to 100
10
Parameter can be accessed if the [Ramp type] (rPt) = [Customized] (CUS), page 59.
M [End Dec round]
0 to (100-tA3)
10
Parameter can be accessed if the [Ramp type] (rPt) = [Customized] (CUS), page 59.
M [Low speed]
0 to HSP
0
LSP to tFr
bFr
Motor frequency at min. reference
HSP
M [High speed]
Motor frequency at max. reference. Ensure that this setting is appropriate for the motor and the application.
ItH
M [Mot. therm. current]
0.2 to 1.5 In (1)
In accordance
with the drive
rating
Set [Mot. therm. current] (ItH) to the nominal current indicated on the motor's rating plate.
If you wish to suppress thermal protection, see [Overload fault mgt] (OLL), page 90.
UFr
M [IR compensation]
0 to 100%
20%
- For [U/F mot 1 selected] (UFt) = [SVC] (n) or [Energy sav.] (nLd), page 41: IR compensation
- For [U/F mot 1 selected] (UFt) = [Cst. torque] (L) or [Var. torque] (P), page 41: Voltage boost
Used to optimize the torque at very low speed (increase [IR compensation] (UFr) if the torque is insufficient).
Check that the value for [IR compensation] (UFr) is not too high when the motor is in a hot state otherwise some
instabilities can occur.
Note: Changing [U/F mot 1 selected] (UFt), page 41, will cause [IR compensation] (UFr) to return to its factory
setting (20%).
FLG
g
M [FreqLoopGain]
1 to 100%
20%
Parameter can only be accessed if [U/F mot 1 selected] (UFt) = [SVC] (n) or [Energy sav.] (nLd), page 41.
The FLG parameter adjusts the drive's ability to follow the speed ramp on the basis of the inertia of the machine
being driven.
Too high a gain may result in operating instability.
FLG low
FLG correct
In this case,
increase FLG.
FLG high
In this case,
reduce FLG.
(1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.
g
30
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
[SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu
rEF-
Code
StA
Adjustment range Factory setting SEt-
Description
M [Fr.Loop.Stab]
1 to 100%
drC-
20%
I_O-
Parameter can only be accessed if [U/F mot 1 selected] (UFt) = [SVC] (n) or [Energy sav.] (nLd), page 41.
Used to adapt the return to steady state after a speed transient (acceleration or deceleration), according to the
dynamics of the machine.
Gradually increase the stability to avoid any overspeed.
StA low
g
SLP
g
IdC
g
CtLFUnFLt-
StA high
StA correct
COM-
In this case,
increase StA.
In this case,
reduce StA.
M [Slip compensation]
0 to 150%
SUP-
100%
Parameter can only be accessed if [U/F mot 1 selected] (UFt) = [SVC] (n) or [Energy sav.] (nLd), page 41.
Adjusts the slip compensation around the value set by the nominal motor speed.
The speeds given on motor rating plates are not necessarily exact.
• If slip setting & lt; actual slip: the motor is not rotating at the correct speed in steady state.
• If slip setting & gt; actual slip: the motor is overcompensated and the speed is unstable.
M [DC inject. level 1]
(2)
0 to In (1)
0.7 In (1)
Parameter can be accessed if [Type of stop] (Stt) = [DC injection] (dCI), page 62, or if [DC injection assign.] (dCI)
is not set to [No] (nO), page 63.
After 5 seconds, the injection current is limited to 0.5 [Mot. therm. current] (ItH) if set to a higher value.
CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
• Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
tdC
g
M [DC injection time 2]
(2)
0.1 to 30 s
0.5 s
Parameter can be accessed if [Type of stop] (Stt) = [DC injection] (dCI) , page 62.
CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
• Long periods of DC injection braking can cause overheating and damage the motor.
• Protect the motor by avoiding long periods of DC injection braking.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
(1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.
(2) Note: These settings are not related to the " automatic standstill DC injection " function.
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
31
[SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu
Code
tdC1
g
Description
Adjustment range Factory setting
M [Auto DC inj. time 1]
0.1 to 30 s
0.5 s
Parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is not set to [No] (nO), page 65.
CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
• Long periods of DC injection braking can cause overheating and damage the motor.
• Protect the motor by avoiding long periods of DC injection braking.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
SdC1
g
M [Auto DC inj. level 1]
0 to 1.2 In (1)
0.7 In (1)
Parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is not set to [No] (nO), page 65.
CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
• Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
tdC2
g
M [Auto DC inj. time 2]
0 to 30 s
0s
Parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is not set to [No] (nO), page 65.
CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
• Long periods of DC injection braking can cause overheating and damage the motor.
• Protect the motor by avoiding long periods of DC injection braking.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
SdC2
g
M [Auto DC inj. level 2]
0 to 1.2 In (1)
0.5 In (1)
Parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is not set to [No] (nO), page 65.
CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
• Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
(1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.
g
32
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
[SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu
rEF-
Code
JPF
Adjustment range Factory setting SEt-
Description
M [Skip Frequency]
0 to 500 Hz
drC-
0 Hz
I_O-
Helps to prevent prolonged operation at a frequency range of ± 1 Hz around [Skip Frequency] (JPF). This function
CtLhelps to prevent a critical speed which leads to resonance. Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive.
JF2
M [Skip Frequency 2]
1 to 500 Hz
FUn-
0 Hz
FLt-
Helps to prevent prolonged operation at a frequency range of ± 1 Hz around [Skip Frequency 2] (JF2). This
function helps to prevent a critical speed which leads to resonance. Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive.
JGF
M [Jog frequency]
g
rPG
M [PID prop. gain]
M [PID integral gain]
g
nO
YES
rP2
g
rP3
g
rP4
g
0.01 to 100
1
0.01 to 100/s
1
Parameter is only visible if [PID feedback ass.] (PIF) is not set to [No] (nO), page 77.
It provides static precision when PI feedback is changing slowly.
M [PID fbk scale factor]
0.1 to 100
1
Parameter is only visible if [PID feedback ass.] (PIF) is not set to [No] (nO), page 77.
For adapting the process.
g
PIC
SUP-
Parameter is only visible if [PID feedback ass.] (PIF) is not set to [No] (nO), page 77.
It provides dynamic performance when PI feedback is changing quickly.
g
FbS
10 Hz
Parameter can be accessed if [JOG] (JOG) is not set to [No] (nO), page 72.
g
rIG
0 to 10 Hz
COM-
M [PID correct. reverse]
[No] (nO)
Parameter is only visible if [PID feedback ass.] (PIF) is not set to [No] (nO), page 77.
v
v
[No] (nO): Normal
[Yes] (YES): Reverse
M [Preset ref. PID 2]
0 to 100%
30%
Parameter is only visible if [PID feedback ass.] (PIF) is not set to [No] (nO), page 77, and if [2 preset PID ref.]
(Pr2), page 77, has been enabled by the input selection.
M [Preset ref. PID 3]
0 to 100%
60%
Parameter is only visible if [PID feedback ass.] (PIF) is not set to [No] (nO), page 77, and if [4 preset PID ref.]
(Pr4), page 78, has been enabled by the input selection.
M [Preset ref. PID 4]
0 to 100%
90%
Parameter is only visible if [PID feedback ass.] (PIF) is not set to [No] (nO), page 77, and if [4 preset PID ref.]
(Pr4), page 78, has been enabled by the input selection.
SP2
M [Preset speed 2]
g
See page 70.
g
0 to 500 Hz
10 Hz
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
33
[SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu
rEF-
Code
SEt-
Description
Adjustment
range
drCI_O-
SP3
M [Preset speed 3]
CtL-
g
M [Preset speed 4]
COM-
g
SP5
M [Preset speed 5]
g
M [Preset speed 6]
g
M [Preset speed 7]
g
M [Preset speed 8]
g
M [Preset speed 9]
g
M [Preset speed 10]
g
M [Preset speed 11]
g
M [Preset speed 12]
g
M [Preset speed 13]
g
M [Preset speed 14]
g
M [Preset speed 15]
g
M [Preset speed 16]
g
0 to 500 Hz
45 Hz
0 to 500 Hz
50 Hz
0 to 500 Hz
55 Hz
0 to 500 Hz
60 Hz
0 to 500 Hz
70 Hz
0 to 500 Hz
80 Hz
0 to 500 Hz
90 Hz
0 to 500 Hz
100 Hz
See page 71.
SP16
40 Hz
See page 71.
SP15
0 to 500 Hz
See page 71.
SP14
35 Hz
See page 71.
SP13
0 to 500 Hz
See page 71.
SP12
30 Hz
See page 70.
SP11
0 to 500 Hz
See page 70.
SP10
25 Hz
See page 70.
SP9
0 to 500 Hz
See page 70.
SP8
20 Hz
See page 70.
SP7
0 to 500 Hz
See page 70.
SP6
15 Hz
See page 70.
SUP-
0 to 500 Hz
See page 70.
SP4
Factory setting
See page 71.
FUnFLt-
g
34
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
[SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu
rEF-
Code
CLI
Description
Adjustment
range
0.25 to 1.5 In (1)
M [Current Limitation]
Factory setting
1.5 In (1)
SEtdrCI_O-
Used to limit the torque and the temperature rise of the motor.
CtL-
CAUTION
FUnFLt-
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR AND THE DRIVE
• Check that the motor will withstand this current, particularly in the case of permanent magnet
synchronous motors, which are susceptible to demagnetization.
• Check that the profile mission complies with the derating curve given in the installation manual.
COMSUP-
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
CL2
g
M [I Limit. 2 value]
0.25 to 1.5 In (1)
1.5 In (1)
Parameter is only visible if [Current limit 2] (LC2) is not set to [No] (nO), page 82.
CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR AND THE DRIVE
• Check that the motor will withstand this current, particularly in the case of permanent magnet
synchronous motors, which are susceptible to demagnetization.
• Check that the profile mission complies with the derating curve given in the installation manual.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
tLS
M [Low speed time out]
0 to 999.9 s
0 (no time limit)
After operating at [Low speed] (LSP) for a given time, the motor is stopped automatically. The motor restarts if
the frequency reference is greater than the [Low speed] (LSP) and if a run command is still present.
Note: Value 0 corresponds to an unlimited period.
rSL
g
M [PID wake up thresh.]
0 to 100%
0%
Parameter is only visible if [PID feedback ass.] (PIF) is not set to [No] (nO), page 77.
If the " PI " and " Low speed operating time " [Low speed time out] (tLS) functions, page 35, are configured at the
same time, the PI regulator may attempt to set a speed lower than [Low speed] (LSP).
This results in unsatisfactory operation, which consists of starting, operating at [Low speed] (LSP), then
stopping, and so on.
The [PID wake up thresh.] (rSL) parameter (restart error threshold) is used to set a minimum PID error threshold
for restarting after a stop at prolonged [Low speed] (LSP).
The function is inactive if [Low speed time out] (tLS) = 0.
DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• Check that unintended restarts will not present any danger.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
UFr2
g
M [IR compensation 2]
0 to 100%
20%
- For [U/F mot.2 selected] (UFt2) = [SVC] (n) or [Energy sav.] (nLd): IR compensation.
- For [U/F mot.2 selected] (UFt2) = [Cst. torque] (L) or [Var. torque] (P): voltage boost.
Used to optimize the torque at very low speed (increase [IR compensation 2] (UFr2) if the torque is insufficient).
Check that the value for [IR compensation 2] (UFr2) is not too high when the motor is in a hot state otherwise
some instabilities can occur. Changing [U/F mot.2 selected] (UFt2) will cause [IR compensation 2] (UFr2) to
return to its factory setting (20%).
(1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
35
[SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu
rEF-
Code
SEt-
Description
Adjustment
range
0 to 100%
drCI_O-
FLG2
M [FreqLoopGain 2]
Factory setting
20%
Parameter can only be accessed if [U/F mot.2 selected] (UFT2) = [SVC] (n) or [Energy sav.] (nLd), page 84.
The [FreqLoopGain 2] (FLG2) parameter adjusts the drive's ability to follow the speed ramp on the basis of the
inertia of the machine being driven.
Too high a gain may result in operating instability.
CtLFUnFLtCOM-
g
SUP-
FLG2 low
FLG2 high
FLG2 correct
In this case,
increase FLG2.
StA2
In this case,
reduce FLG2.
M [Freq. loop stability 2]
0 to 100%
20%
Parameter can only be accessed if [U/F mot.2 selected] (UFT2) = [SVC] (n) or [Energy sav.] (nLd), page 84.
Used to adapt the return to steady state after a speed transient (acceleration or deceleration), according to the dynamics
of the machine.
Gradually increase the stability to avoid any overspeed.
StA2 low
StA2 correct
StA2 high
g
In this case,
increase StA2
SLP2
g
Ftd
M [Slip compensation 2]
In this case,
reduce StA2
0 to 150%
100%
Parameter can only be accessed if [U/F mot.2 selected] (UFT2) = [SVC] (n) or [Energy sav.] (nLd), page 84.
Adjusts the slip compensation around the value set by the nominal motor speed.
The speeds given on motor rating plates are not necessarily exact.
• If slip setting & lt; actual slip: The motor is not rotating at the correct speed in steady state.
• If slip setting & gt; actual slip: The motor is overcompensated and the speed is unstable.
M [Freq. threshold]
0 to 500 Hz
bFr
Threshold beyond which the contact on the relay ([R2 Assignment] (r2) = [Freq.Th.att.] (FtA)) closes or output dO
= 24 V ([Logic output] (dO) = [Freq. limit] (FtA)).
ttd
M [Motor therm. level]
1 to 118%
100%
Threshold beyond which the contact on the relay ([R2 Assignment] (r2) = [Th.mot. att.] (tSA)) closes or output dO
= 24 V ([Logic output] (dO) = [Drv thermal] (tSA)).
Ctd
M [Current threshold]
0 to 1.5 In (1)
In (1)
Threshold beyond which the contact on the relay ([R2 Assignment] (r2) = [I attained] (CtA)) closes or output dO =
24 V ([Logic output] (dO) = [Current limit] (CtA)).
(1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.
g
36
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
[SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu
rEF-
Code
SdS
Adjustment
range
M [Scale factor display]
Factory setting SEt-
0.1 to 200
Description
30
drCI_O-
Used to display a value in proportion to the output frequency [Output frequency] (rFr): the machine speed, the motor
speed, etc.
• If [Scale factor display] (SdS) y 1, [Cust. output value] (SPd1) is displayed (possible definition = 0.01)
• If 1 & lt; [Scale factor display] (SdS) y 10, [Cust. output value] (SPd2) is displayed (possible definition = 0.1)
• If [Scale factor display] (SdS) & gt; 10, [Cust. output value] (SPd3) is displayed (possible definition = 1)
• If [Scale factor display] (SdS) & gt; 10 and [Scale factor display] (SdS) x [Output frequency] (rFr) & gt; 9,999:
the display will show
[Cust. output value] (SPd3) =
FUnFLtCOMSUP-
[Scale factor display] (SdS) x [Output frequency] (rFr)
1000
to 2 decimal places
example: for 24,223, display will show 24.22
• If [Scale factor display] (SdS) & gt; 10 and [Scale factor display] (SdS) x [Output frequency] (rFr) & gt; 65,535, display
locked at 65.54
Example: Display motor speed for
4-pole motor, 1,500 rpm at 50 Hz (synchronous speed):
[Scale factor display] (SdS) = 30
[Cust. output value] (SPd3) = 1,500 at [Output frequency] (rFr) = 50 Hz
SFr
CtL-
M [Switching freq.]
(1)
2.0 to 16 kHz
4 kHz
Parameter can also be accessed in the [MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu. The frequency can be adjusted to
reduce the noise generated by the motor.
If the frequency has been set to a value higher than 4 kHz, in the event of excessive temperature rise, the drive
will automatically reduce the switching frequency and increase it again once the temperature has returned to
normal.
(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu.
37
[MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu
rEFSEtdrCI_O-
Standard motor frequency
CtLFUnFLtCOMSUP-
Return to factory settings/Restore configuration
With the exception of [Auto tuning] (tUn), which can power up the motor, parameters can only be changed in stop mode, with no run
command present.
Drive performance can be optimized by:
- Entering the values given on the motor rating plate in the Drive menu
- Performing an auto-tune operation (on a standard asynchronous motor)
Code
bFr
50
60
UnS
Description
Adjustment
range
M [Standard mot. freq]
Factory
setting
[50Hz IEC] (50)
[50Hz IEC] (50): 50 Hz: IEC
[60Hz NEMA] (60): 60 Hz: NEMA
This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters: [High speed] (HSP), page 30, [Freq.
threshold] (Ftd), page 36, [Rated motor freq.] (FrS), page 38, and [Max frequency] (tFr), page 41.
M [Rated motor volt.]
In accordance
with the drive
rating
In accordance
with the drive
rating
Nominal motor voltage given on the rating plate. When the line voltage is lower than the nominal motor voltage,
set [Rated motor volt.] (UnS) to the same value as the line voltage for the drive terminals.
8I64S2*****.00X-1: 100 to 240 V
8I64T2*****.00X-1: 100 to 240 V
8I64T4*****.00X-1: 100 to 500 V
FrS
M [Rated motor freq.]
10 to 500 Hz
50 Hz
Nominal motor frequency marked on the rating plate. The factory setting is 50 Hz, or 60 Hz if [Standard mot.
freq] (bFr) is set to 60 Hz.
Note: The ratio
[Rated motor volt.] (UnS) (in volts)
[Rated motor freq.] (FrS) (in Hz)
must not exceed the following values:
8I64S2*****.00X-1: 7 max.
8I64T2*****.00X-1: 7 max.
8I64T4*****.00X-1: 14 max.
The factory setting is 50 Hz, or preset to 60 Hz if [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) is set to 60 Hz.
nCr
M [Rated mot. current]
0.25 to 1.5 In (1)
Nominal motor current given on the rating plate.
(1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.
38
In accordance
with the drive
rating
[MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu
rEF-
Code
nSP
Description
Adjustment range Factory setting SEt-
M [Rated motor speed]
0 to 32,760 rpm
In accordance
with the drive
rating
drCI_OCtL-
0 to 9,999 rpm then 10.00 to 32.76 krpm
If, rather than the nominal speed, the nameplate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz or as a
%, calculate the nominal speed as follows:
• Nominal speed = synchronous speed x
or
• Nominal speed = synchronous speed x
or
• Nominal speed = synchronous speed x
COS
100 - slip as a %
100
50 - slip in Hz
50
60 - slip in Hz
60
M [Motor 1 Cosinus Phi]
FUnFLtCOM-
(50 Hz motors)
SUP-
(60 Hz motors)
0.5 to 1
In accordance
with the drive
rating
Motor Cos Phi given on the motor rating plate
rSC
nO
InIt
8888
[No] (nO)
M [Cold stator resist.]
v [No] (nO): function inactive. For applications which do not require high performance or do not tolerate
v
v
automatic auto-tuning (passing a current through the motor) each time the drive is powered up.
[Init] (InIt): activates the function. To improve low-speed performance whatever the thermal state of the motor.
Value of cold state stator resistance used, in m
Note:
• It is strongly recommended that this function is activated for mechanical handling applications.
• The function should only be activated [Init] (InIt) when the motor is cold.
• When [Cold stator resist.] (rSC) = [Init] (InIt), the [Auto-tuning] (tUn) parameter is forced to [Power on] (POn).
At the next run command the stator resistance is measured with an auto-tune. The [Cold stator resist.] (rSC)
then changes to a value of (8888) and maintains it, [Auto-tuning] (tUn) is still forced to [Power on] (POn).
The [Cold stator resist.] (rSC) parameter remains at [Init] (InIt) as long as the measurement has not been
performed.
• Value 8888 can be forced or changed using the jog dial (1).
(1) Procedure:
- Check that the motor is cold.
- Disconnect the cables from the motor terminals.
- Measure the resistance between 2 of the motor terminals (U. V. W.) without modifying its connection.
- Use the jog dial to enter half the measured value.
- Increase the factory setting of [IR compensation] (UFr), page 30, to 100% rather than 20%.
Note: Do not use [Cold stator resist.] (rSC) if it is not set to [No] (nO) or = [Power on] (POn) with catch on the fly ([CATCH ON THE FLY]
(FLr-), page 89).
39
[MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu
rEFSEt-
Code
Description
Adjustment
range
drC-
tUn
I_O-
M [Auto tuning]
Factory setting
[No] (nO)
CtL-
DANGER
FUnFLt-
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
COM-
• During auto-tuning the motor operates at nominal current.
• Do not work on the motor during auto-tuning.
SUP-
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
• It is essential that the [Rated motor volt.] (UnS), [Rated motor freq.] (FrS), [Rated mot. current]
(nCr), [Rated motor speed] (nSP), [Motor 1 Cosinus Phi.] (COS) parameters are configured
correctly before starting auto-tuning.
• When one or more parameters have been changed after auto-tuning has been performed,
[Auto-tuning] (tUn) will return [No] (nO) and the procedure will have to be repeated.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.
nO
YES
v
v
dOnE
rUn
POn
v
v
v
LI1
to
LI4
v
[No] (nO): Auto-tuning not performed
[Yes] (YES): [Auto-tuning] (tUn) could only be set to [Yes] (YES) with the AsIOAcc library in an application.
Auto-tuning is performed as soon as possible, then the parameter automatically changes to [Done]
(dOnE) or [No] (nO) in the event that Auto-tuning is not successful [AUTO TUNING FAULT] (tnF) is
displayed if [Autotune fault mgt] (tnL) = [Yes] (YES), page 91.
[Done] (dOnE): Use of the values given the last time auto-tuning was performed
[Drv running] (rUn): Auto-tuning is performed every time a run command is sent
[Power on] (POn): [Auto-tuning] (tUn) could only be set to [Power on] (POn) with the [Cold stator resist.]
(rSC) ([Cold stator resist.] (rSC) = [Init] (InIt), see the note below). Auto-tuning is performed on every
power-up
[LI1] to [LI4] (LI1) to (LI4): Auto-tuning is performed on the transition from 0 V 1 of a logic input assigned
to this function
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR ARC FLASH
When [Auto tuning] (tUn) is set [Power on] (POn), Auto tune will be performed every time the
power will be switched on.
• Check this action will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
Note:
[Auto-tuning] (tUn) is forced to [Power on] (POn) if [Cold stator resist.] (rSC) = [Init] (InIt).
Auto-tuning is only performed if no command has been activated. If a " freewheel stop " or " fast stop "
function is assigned to a logic input, this input must be set to 1 (active at 0).
Auto-tuning may take 1 to 2 seconds. Do not interrupt the process. Wait for the display to change to [Done]
(dOnE) or [No] (nO).
tUS
tAb
PEnd
PrOG
FAIL
dOnE
Strd
40
M [Auto tuning state]
v
v
v
v
v
v
[Not done] (tAb)
(For information only, cannot be modified)
[Not done] (tAb): The default stator resistance value is used to control the motor
[Pending] (PEnd): Auto-tuning has been requested but not yet performed
[In Progress] (PrOG): Auto-tuning in progress
[Failed] (FAIL): Auto-tuning was unsuccessful
[Done] (dOnE): The stator resistance measured by the auto-tuning function is used to control the motor
[Entered R1] (Strd): The cold state stator resistance ([Cold stator resist.] (rSC) which is not set to [No]
(nO)) is used to control the motor
[MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu
rEF-
Code
UFt
L
P
n
nLd
Description
Adjustment
range
Factory setting
SEtdrC-
[SVC] (n)
M [U/F mot 1 selected]
v [Cst. torque] (L): Constant torque for motors connected in parallel or special motors
v [Var. torque] (P): Variable torque for pump and fan applications
v [SVC] (n): Sensorless flux vector control for constant torque applications
v [Energy sav.] (nLd): Energy saving, for variable torque applications not requiring high dynamics (behaves
I_OCtLFUnFLt-
in a similar way to the [Var. torque] (P) ratio with no load and the [SVC] (n) ratio on load)
COM-
Voltage
SUP-
Frequency
nrd
YES
nO
M [Noise reduction]
v [Yes] (YES): Frequency with random modulation
v [No] (nO): Fixed frequency
[Yes] (YES)
Random frequency modulation helps to prevent any resonance which may occur at a fixed frequency.
SFr
M [Switching freq.]
(1)
2.0 to 16 kHz
4 kHz
The frequency can be adjusted to reduce the noise generated by the motor.
If the frequency has been set to a value higher than 4 kHz, in the event of excessive temperature rise, the
drive will automatically reduce the switching frequency and increase it again once the temperature has
returned to normal.
tFr
M [Max frequency]
10 to 500 Hz
60 Hz
The factory setting is 60 Hz, or preset to 72 Hz if [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) is set to 60 Hz.
SrF
nO
YES
[No] (nO):
M [Speed loop filter]
v [No] (nO): The speed loop filter is active (helps to prevent the reference being exceeded)
v [Yes] (YES): The speed loop filter is suppressed (in position control applications, this reduces the response
time and the reference may be exceeded)
(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
41
[MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu
rEFSEt-
Code
drC-
SCS
I_O-
Description
nO
StrI
CtL-
(1)
[No] (nO)
M [Saving config.]
v [No] (nO): Function inactive
v [Config 1] (Str1): Saves the current configuration (but not the result of auto-tuning) to EEPROM. [Saving
config.] (SCS) automatically switches to [No] (nO) as soon as the save has been performed. This function
is used to keep another configuration in reserve, in addition to the current configuration.
When drives leave the factory the current configuration and the backup configuration are both initialized
with the factory configuration.
[Saving config.] (SCS) automatically switches to [No] (nO) as soon as the save has been performed
FUnFLt-
2s
COM-
CFG
SUP-
Adjustment range Factory setting
M [Macro configuration]
(1)
[Factory set.] (Std)
DANGER
2s
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Check that the selected macro configuration is compatible with the wiring diagram used.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
StS
v
Std
v
Choice of source configuration.
[Start/Stop] (StS): Start/stop configuration
Identical to the factory configuration apart from the I/O assignments:
• Logic inputs:
- LI1, LI2 (reversing): 2-wire transition detection control, LI1 = run forward, LI2 = run reverse
- LI3 to LI4: Inactive (not assigned)
• Analog inputs:
- AI1: Not applicable
- AI2, AI3: Inactive (not assigned)
• Relay R1: Not applicable
• Relay R2: Inactive (not assigned)
• Analog output AOC: Not applicable
[Factory set.] (Std): Factory configuration (see page 10)
Note: The assignment of [Macro configuration] (CFG) results directly in a return to the selected
configuration.
(1) [Saving config.] (SCS), [Macro configuration] (CFG), and [Restore config.] (FCS) can be accessed from several configuration menus,
but they apply to all menus and parameters.
2s
42
The jog dial (ENT) needs to be pressed and held down (for 2 s) to change the assignment for this parameter.
[MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu
rEF-
Code
Adjustment range Factory setting
FCS
M [Restore config.]
SEt-
(1)
Description
drC-
[No] (nO)
I_O-
DANGER
2s
CtL-
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
FUn-
Check that the changes made to the current configuration are compatible with the wiring
diagram used.
FLtCOM-
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
nO
rECI
v
v
InI
v
SUP-
[No] (nO): Function inactive
[Internal] (rEC1): The current configuration becomes identical to the backup configuration previously
saved by [Saving config.] (SCS) = [Config 1] (Str1).
[Internal] (rEC1) is only visible if the backup has been carried out. [Restore config.] (FCS) automatically
switches to [No] (nO) as soon as this action has been performed.
[Factory Set.] (InI): The current configuration is replaced by the configuration selected by the [Macro
configuration] (CFG) parameter (2). [Restore config.] (FCS) automatically switches to [No] (nO) as soon
as this action has been performed.
Note: If nAd appears on the display briefly before the parameter switches to [No] (nO), this means that
the configuration transfer is not possible and has not been performed (different drive ratings, for
example). If ntr appears on the display briefly before the parameter switches to [No] (nO), this means
that an invalid configuration transfer has occurred and that the factory settings will need to be restored
using [Factory Set.] (InI).
In both cases, check the configuration to be transfered before trying again.
(1) [Saving config.] (SCS), [Macro configuration] (CFG), and [Restore config.] (FCS) can be accessed from several configuration menus,
but they apply to all menus and parameters.
(2) The following parameters are not modified by this function; they retain their configuration:
- [Standard mot. freq] (bFr), page 38
- [HMI command] (LCC), page 58
- [PIN code 1] (COd), (terminal access code), page 99
- The parameters in the [COMMUNICATION] (COM-) menu
- The parameters in the [MONITORING] (SUP-) menu
2s
The jog dial (ENT) needs to be pressed and held down (for 2 s) to change the assignment for this parameter.
43
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I_O-) menu
rEFSEtdrCI_O-
2-wire/3-wire control
CtLFUnFLtCOMSUP-
Return to factory settings/Restore configuration
The parameters can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present.
Code
Description
Adjustment range
M [2/3 wire control]
tCC
Factory setting
[2 wire] (2C)
See page 27.
2s
M [2 wire type]
tCt
[Transition] (trn)
DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Check that the changes made to 2-wire control are compatible with the wiring diagram used.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
LEL
trn
v
v
PFO
v
2s
44
Parameter can be accessed if [2/3 wire control] (tCC) = [2 wire] (2C), page 44.
[Level] (LEL): State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run or stop
[Transition] (trn): A change of state (transition or edge) is necessary to initiate operation, in order to help
prevent accidental restarts after a break in the power supply
[Fwd priority] (PFO): State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run or stop, but the " forward " input takes priority
over the " reverse " input
The jog dial (ENT) needs to be pressed and held down (for 2 s) to change the assignment for this parameter.
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I_O-) menu
rEF-
Code
rrS
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
Description
Adjustment
range
M [Reverse assign.]
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
SEt-
Factory setting
drC-
[LI2] (LI2)
I_O-
If [Reverse assign.] (rrS) = [No] (nO), run reverse remains active by means of negative voltage on AI2, for
example.
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logic input LI1
[LI2] (LI2): Logic input LI2 can be accessed if [2/3 wire control] (tCC) = [2 wire] (2C), page 44.
[LI3] (LI3): Logic input LI3
[LI4] (LI4): Logic input LI4
[LI5] (LI5): Not applicable
[LI6] (LI6): Not applicable
CrL3
M [AI3 min. value]
0 to 20 mA
4 mA
CrH3
M [AI3 max. value]
4 to 20 mA
20 mA
These two parameters are used to configure the input for 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, 20-4 mA, etc.
Frequency
Frequency
Example:
20 - 4 mA
AO1t
M [AO1 Type]
[Current](0A)
This parameter is not visible when CANopen communication card is connected.
0A
4A
10U
dO
v
v
v
[Current] (0A): 0 - 20 mA configuration; this configuration is used for dO.
[Cur. 4-20] (4A): Not applicable
[Voltage] (10U): Not applicable
M [Logic output]
[No] (nO)
This parameter is not visible when CANopen communication card is connected.
nO
OCr
OFr
Otr
OPr
v
v
v
v
v
FLt
rUn
FtA
v
v
v
FLA
CtA
v
v
SrA
tSA
v
v
bLC
v
APL
v
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[I motor] (OCr): Not applicable
[Motor freq.] (OFr): Not applicable
[Motor torq.] (Otr): Not applicable
[P. supplied] (OPr): Not applicable
Making the following assignments will transform the analog output to a logic output (see diagram in the
Installation Manual):
[Drive fault] (FLt): Fault detected
[Drv running] (rUn): Drive running
[Freq. limit] (FtA): Frequency threshold reached ([Freq. threshold] (Ftd) parameter in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-)
menu, page 36)
[HSP limit] (FLA): [High speed] (HSP) reached
[I attained] (CtA): Current threshold reached ([Current threshold] (Ctd) parameter in the
[SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu, page 36)
[Freq. ref.] (SrA): Frequency reference reached
[Drv thermal] (tSA): Motor thermal threshold reached ([Motor therm. level] (ttd) parameter in the
[SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu, page 36)
[Brake seq] (bLC): Brake sequence (for information, as this assignment can only be activated or deactivated
from the [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu, page 81)
[No 4-20mA] (APL): Not applicable
The logic output is in state 1 (24 V) when the selected assignment is active, with the exception of [Drive
fault] (FLt) (state 1 if the drive operation is normal).
Note: At the Automation Studio the parameter dO has to be set to bLC, when bLC = dO.
45
CtLFUnFLtCOMSUP-
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I_O-) menu
rEFSEt-
Code
drC-
Description
Adjustment range
M [R1 Assignment]
r1
I_O-
Factory setting
[No drive flt](FLt)
Not applicable
CtL-
r2
FUn-
nO
FLt
rUn
FtA
FLtCOMSUP-
[No] (nO)
M [R2 Assignment]
v [No] (nO): Not assigned
v [No drive flt] (FLt): No drive detected fault
v [Drv running] (rUn): Drive running
v [Freq.Th.att.] (FtA): Frequency threshold reached ([Freq. threshold] (Ftd) parameter in the [SETTINGS]
FLA
CtA
v
v
SrA
tSA
v
v
bLC
v
APL
LI1
to
LI4
v
v
(SEt-) menu, page 36)
[HSP attain.] (FLA): [High speed] (HSP) reached
[I attained] (CtA): Current threshold reached ([Current threshold] (Ctd) parameter in the
[SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu, page 36)
[Freq.ref.att] (SrA): Frequency reference reached
[Th.mot. att.] (tSA): Motor thermal threshold reached ([Motor therm. level] (ttd) parameter in the
[SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu, page 36)
[Brk control] (bLC): Brake sequence (for information, as this assignment can only be activated or
deactivated from the [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)- menu, page 81)
[4-20mA] (APL): Not applicable
[LI1] to [LI4] (LI1) to (LI4): Returns the value of the selected logic input
The relay is energized when the selected assignment is active, with the exception of [No drive flt] (FLt)
(energized if the drive has not detected a fault).
Note: At the Automation Studio the parameter r2 has to be set to bLC, when bLC = r2.
CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO MOTOR
Below hardware revision B5: With the settings [No drive flt] (FLt) and [LI1] to [LI4] (LI1) to (LI4)
the R2 is also switched on, when the X2X communication is disconnected.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
SCS
2s
CFG
2s
FCS
2s
M [Saving config.] (1)
nO
See page 42.
M [Macro configuration] (1)
Std
See page 42.
M [Restore config.] (1)
nO
See page 43.
(1) [Saving config.] (SCS), [Macro configuration] (CFG), and [Restore config.] (FCS) can be accessed from several configuration menus,
but they apply to all menus and parameters.
2s
46
The jog dial (ENT) needs to be pressed and held down (for 2 s) to change the assignment for this parameter.
[COMMAND] (CtL-) menu
rEFSEtdrCI_O-
Function access level
CtLFUnFLtCOM-
Return to factory settings/Restore configuration
SUP-
The parameters can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present.
Control and reference channels
Run commands (forward, reverse, etc.) and references can be sent using the following channels:
Command CMD
tEr: Terminals (LIx)
LOC: Control via the keypad
nEt: Integrated communication interface
LCC: Remote display terminal
Reference rFr
AIx: Terminals
AIV1: Jog dial
nEt: Integrated communication interface
LCC: Remote display terminal
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
The stop buttons on the ACOPOSinverter X64 (integrated into the drive and on the remote terminals) can be programmed as non-priority
buttons. A stop button can only have priority if the [Stop Key priority] (PSt) parameter in the [COMMAND] (CtL-) menu, page 58, is set to
[Yes] (YES).
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
The [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) parameter in the [COMMAND] (CtL-) menu, page 55, can be used to select priority modes for the control and
reference channels. It has 3 function levels:
• [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = Basic functions. The channels are managed in order of priority.
[Level 1] (L1):
• [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = Provides the option of additional functions compared with [Level 1] (L1):
[Level 2] (L2):
- +/- speed (motorized jog dial)
- Brake control
- 2nd current limit switching
- Motor switching
- Management of limit switches
• [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = Same functions as with [Level 2] (L2). Management of the control and reference channels is
[Level 3] (L3):
configurable.
47
[COMMAND] (CtL-) menu
rEFSEtdrCI_OCtL-
These channels can be combined in order of priority if [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 1] (L1) or
[Level 2] (L2).
Highest priority to lowest priority: Forced local mode, Integrated communication interface (Network), Terminals/Keypad (from right to left in
the diagram below)
FUnFLtCOMSUP-
Forced local mode
See the detailed block diagrams on pages 50 and 51.
• On ACOPOSinverter X64 drives, in factory settings mode, control and reference are managed by the terminals.
• With a remote terminal display, if [HMI command] (LCC) = [Yes] (YES) ([COMMAND] (CtL-) menu), control and reference are
managed by the remote terminal display (reference via [HMI Frequency ref.] (LFr) in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu).
The channels can be combined by configuration if [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 3] (L3).
Combined control and reference ([Profile] (CHCF) parameter = [Not separ.] (SIM)):
Selection of reference channel:
[Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) parameter
The control channel is
connected to the same
source.
Control and reference
Selection of reference
channel:
[Ref.2 channel] (Fr2)
parameter
The control channel is
connected to the same source.
The [Ref. 2 switching] (rFC) parameter can be used to select the [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.2 channel] (Fr2) channel, or to configure a
logic input or a control word bit for remote switching of either one.
See the detailed block diagrams on pages 52 and 54.
48
[COMMAND] (CtL-) menu
rEF-
Separate control and reference ([Profile] (CHCF) parameter = [Separate] (SEP)):
SEt-
Reference
drCI_O-
Selection of reference
channel:
[Ref.1 channel] (Fr1)
parameter
CtLFUn-
Reference
FLtCOM-
Selection of reference
channel:
[Ref.2 channel] (Fr2)
parameter
SUP-
The [Ref. 2 switching] (rFC) parameter can be used to select the [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.2 channel] (Fr2) channel, or to configure a
logic input or a control word bit for remote switching of either one.
Control
Selection of control
channel: [Cmd channel 1]
(Cd1) parameter
Control
Selection of control
channel:
[Cmd channel 2] (Cd2)
parameter
The [Cmd switching] (CCS) parameter, page 57, can be used to select the [Cmd channel 1] (Cd1) or [Cmd channel 2] (Cd2) channel, or
to configure a logic input or a control bit for remote switching of either one.
See the detailed block diagrams on pages 52 and 53.
49
[COMMAND] (CtL-) menu
rEFSEtdrC-
Reference channel for [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 1] (L1) or [Level 2] (L2)
I_OCtL-
Note: In order to configure the +/- speed command ([Ref.1 channel]
(Fr1) = [+/- SPEED] (UPdt) or [+/-spd HMI] (UPdH)), the SA2/SA3
summing inputs and the preset speeds must be deconfigured
beforehand.
FUn+
speed
FLtCOM-
speed
SUP-
PI function
see page 75
+
speed
speed
Key:
Parameter:
The black square represents the
factory setting assignment.
Function can be accessed for [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC)
= [Level 2] (L2)
50
[COMMAND] (CtL-) menu
rEF-
Control channel for [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 1] (L1) or [Level 2] (L2)
SEtdrC-
The [Forced local assign.] (FLO) parameter, page 95, the [HMI command] (LCC) parameter, page 58, and the selection of the network are I_Ocommon to the reference and control channels.
CtLExample: If [HMI command] (LCC) = [Yes] (YES), the command and reference are given by the remote display terminal.
FUnFLtCOMSUP-
Forward
Reverse
STOP
51
[COMMAND] (CtL-) menu
rEFSEt-
Reference channel for [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 3] (L3)
drC-
Note: In order to configure the +/- speed command ([Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) = [+/- SPEED]
(UPdt) or [+/-spd HMI] (UPdH)), the SA2/SA3 summing inputs and the preset speeds must
be deconfigured beforehand.
I_OCtLFUnFLtCOMSUP-
Note:
Jog operation is only
active when the
reference and control
are managed by the
terminals (AIx and LIx).
PI function
see page 75
52
[COMMAND] (CtL-) menu
rEF-
Control channel for [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 3] (L3)
SEtdrC-
Combined reference and control
I_O-
The [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) parameter, page 55, the [Ref.2 channel] (Fr2) parameter, page 55, the [Ref. 2 switching] (rFC) parameter, page
56, the [Forced local assign.] (FLO) parameter, page 95, and the [Forced local Ref.] (FLOC) parameter, page 95, are common to reference CtLand control. The control channel is therefore determined by the reference channel.
FUnExample: If the [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) reference = [AI1] (AI1) (analog input at the terminals), control is via LI (logic input at the terminals).
FLtCOMSUP-
Forced local mode
Forward
Reverse
STOP
53
[COMMAND] (CtL-) menu
rEFSEtdrCI_O-
Control channel for [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 3] (L3)
Mixed mode (separate reference and control)
The [Forced local assign.] (FLO) parameter, page 95, and the [Forced local Ref.] (FLOC) parameter, page 95, are common to reference
and control.
FUn- Example: If the reference is in forced local mode via [AI1] (AI1) (analog input at the terminals), control in forced local mode is via LI (logic
input at the terminals).
CtL-
FLtCOMSUP-
Forced local mode
Forward
Reverse
STOP
54
[COMMAND] (CtL-) menu
Note: There may be an incompatibility between functions (see the incompatibility table, page 18). In this case, the first function configured rEFwill prevent the remainder being configured.
SEtCode
Description
Adjustment
range
M [ACCESS LEVEL]
LAC
drC-
Factory setting
I_OCtL-
[Level 1] (L1) (1)
FUn-
DANGER
FLt-
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
COM-
• Assigning [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) to [Level 3] (L3) will restore the factory settings of the [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1)
parameter, page 55, the [Cmd channel 1] (Cd1) parameter, page 56, the [Profile] (CHCF) parameter, page 56, and
the [2/3 wire control] (tCC) parameter, page 44.
• [Level 3] (L3) can only be restored to [Level 2] (L2) or [Level 1] (L1), and [Level 2] (L2) can only be restored to [Level
1] (L1) by means of a " factory setting " via [Restore config.] (FCS), page 43.
• Check that this change is compatible with the wiring diagram used.
2s
SUP-
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
L1
L2
v
v
L3
v
[Level 1] (L1): Access to standard functions and channel management in order of priority.
[Level 2] (L2): Access to advanced functions in the [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu:
- +/- speed (motorized jog dial)
- Brake control
- 2nd current limit switching
- Motor switching
- Management of limit switches
[Level 3] (L3): Access to advanced functions and management of mixed control modes
M [Ref.1 channel]
Fr1
[AI1] (AI1) (2)
See page 26.
Fr2
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
AIU1
M [Ref.2 channel]
v [No] (nO): Not assigned
v [AI1] (AI1): Not applicable
v [AI2] (AI2): Analog input AI2
v [AI3] (AI3): Analog input AI3
v [AI Virtual 1] (AIV1): Jog dial
UPdt
UpdH
v
v
LCC
v
Ndb
nEt
v
v
[No] (nO)
If [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 2] (L2) or [Level 3] (L3), the following additional assignments are
possible:
[+/-Speed] (UPdt): (3) +/- speed reference via LI. See configuration page 74.
[+/-spd HMI] (UPdH): (3) +/- speed reference via the jog dial on the ACOPOSinverter X64 keypad.
To use, display the frequency [Output frequency] (rFr), page 97. The +/- speed function via the keypad or
the terminal is controlled from the [MONITORING] (SUP-) menu by selecting the [Output frequency] (rFr)
parameter.
If [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 3] (L3), the following additional assignments are possible:
[HMI] (LCC): Reference via the remote display terminal, [HMI Frequency ref.] (LFr) parameter in the
[SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu, page 29
[Modbus] (Mdb): Not applicable
[Com. card] (nEt): Reference via integrated communication interface
(1) When using X2X, the factory setting is changed automatically to [Level 3] (L3).
(2) When using X2X, the factory setting is changed automatically to [Com. card] (nEt).
(3) NOTE:
• It is not possible to simultaneously assign [+/- SPEED] (UPdt) to [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.2 channel] (Fr2), and [+/-spd HMI]
(UPdH) to [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.2 channel] (Fr2). Only one of the [+/- SPEED] (UPdt)/[+/-spd HMI] (UPdH) assignments is
permitted on each reference channel.
• The +/- speed function in [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) is incompatible with several functions (see page 18). It can only be configured if these
functions are unassigned, in particular the summing inputs (set [Summing ref. 2] (SA2) to [No] (nO), page 67) and the preset speeds
(set [2 preset speeds] (PS2) and [4 preset speeds] (PS4) to [No] (nO), page 69) which will have been assigned as part of the factory
settings.
• In [Ref.2 channel] (Fr2), the +/- speed function is compatible with the preset speeds, summing inputs, and the PI regulator.
2s
The jog dial (ENT) needs to be pressed and held down (for 2 s) to change the assignment for this parameter.
55
[COMMAND] (CtL-) menu
rEFSEt-
Code
Description
Adjustment
range
drC-
rFC
I_O-
M [Ref. 2 switching]
CtL-
Factory setting
[ch1 active] (Fr1)
Fr1
Fr2
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
The [Ref. 2 switching] (rFC) parameter can be used to select the [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.2 channel] (Fr2)
channel, or to configure a logic input or a control word bit for remote switching of [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.2
channel] (Fr2).
[ch1 active] (Fr1): Reference = reference 1
[ch2 active] (Fr2): Reference = reference 2
[LI1] (LI1): Logic input LI1
[LI2] (LI2): Logic input LI2
[LI3] (LI3): Logic input LI3
[LI4] (LI4): Logic input LI4
[LI5] (LI5): Not applicable
[LI6] (LI6): Not applicable
C111
C112
C113
C114
C115
C211
C212
C213
C214
C215
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
If [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 3] (L3), the following additional assignments are possible:
[C111] (C111): Not applicable
[C112] (C112): Not applicable
[C113] (C113): Not applicable
[C114] (C114): Not applicable
[C115] (C115): Not applicable
[C211] (C211): Bit 11 of network control word
[C212] (C212): Bit 12 of network control word
[C213] (C213): Bit 13 of network control word
[C214] (C214): Bit 14 of network control word
[C215] (C215): Bit 15 of network control word
FUnFLtCOMSUP-
The reference can be switched with the drive running.
[Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) is active when the logic input or control word bit is at state 0.
[Ref.2 channel] (Fr2) is active when the logic input or control word bit is at state 1.
CHCF
M [Profile]
[Not separ.] (SIM)
(control channels separated from reference channels)
SIN
SEP
Cd1
v
v
M [Cmd channel 1]
g
tEr
LOC
LCC
Ndb
nEt
Cd2
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
[Terminal] (tEr) (1)
Parameter can be accessed if [Profile] (CHCF) = [Separate] (SEP), page 56, and [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) =
[Level 3] (L3), page 55.
[Terminal] (tEr): Control via terminals
[Local] (LOC): Control via keypad
[Remot. HMI] (LCC): Control via remote display terminal
[Modbus] (Mdb): Not applicable
[Com. card] (nEt): Control via the network
M [Cmd channel 2]
g
tEr
LOC
LCC
Ndb
nEt
Parameter can be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 3] (L3), page 55.
[Not separ.] (SIM): Combined
[Separate] (SEP): Separate
[Modbus] (Mdb) (2)
Parameter can be accessed if [Profile] (CHCF) = [Separate] (SEP), page 56, and [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) =
[Level 3] (L3), page 55.
[Terminal] (tEr): Control via terminals
[Local] (LOC): Control via keypad
[Remot. HMI] (LCC): Control via remote display terminal
[Modbus] (Mdb): Not applicable
[Com. card] (nEt): Control via the network
(1) When using X2X, the factory setting is changed automatically to [Com. card] (nEt).
(2) When using X2X, the factory setting is changed automatically to [Terminal] (tEr).
g
56
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
[COMMAND] (CtL-) menu
rEF-
Code
Description
Adjustment range
M [Cmd switching]
CCS
g
Cd1
Cd2
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
C111
C112
C113
C114
C115
C211
C212
C213
C214
C215
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Factory setting SEtdrC-
[ch1 active]
(Cd1)
I_O-
Parameter can be accessed if [Profile] (CHCF) = [Separate] (SEP), page 56, and [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC)
= [Level 3] (L3), page 55.
The [Cmd switching] (CCS) parameter can be used to select the [Cmd channel 1] (Cd1) or [Cmd channel
2] (Cd2) channel, or to configure a logic input or a control word bit for remote switching of [Cmd channel 1]
(Cd1) or [Cmd channel 2] (Cd2).
[ch1 active] (Cd1): Control channel = channel 1
[ch2 active] (Cd2): Control channel = channel 2
[LI1] (LI1): Logic input LI1
[LI2] (LI2): Logic input LI2
[LI3] (LI3): Logic input LI3
[LI4] (LI4): Logic input LI4
[LI5] (LI5): Not applicable
[LI6] (LI6): Not applicable
[C111] (C111): Not applicable
[C112] (C112): Not applicable
[C113] (C113): Not applicable
[C114] (C114): Not applicable
[C115] (C115): Not applicable
[C211] (C211): Bit 11 of network control word
[C212] (C212): Bit 12 of network control word
[C213] (C213): Bit 13 of network control word
[C214] (C214): Bit 14 of network control word
[C215] (C215): Bit 15 of network control word
Channel 1 is active when the input or control word bit is at state 0,
Channel 2 is active when the input or control word bit is at state 1.
M [Copy channel 1 & lt; & gt; 2]
COp
[No] (nO)
(copy only in this direction)
DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Copying the command and/or reference can change the direction of rotation.
• Check that this is safe.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
nO
SP
Cd
ALL
v
v
v
v
Parameter can be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 3] (L3), page 55.
[No] (nO): No copy
[Reference] (SP): Copy reference
[Command] (Cd): Copy control
[Cmd + ref.] (ALL): Copy control and reference
• If channel 2 is controlled via the terminals, channel 1 control is not copied.
• If the channel 2 reference is set via AI2, AI3 or AIU1, the channel 1 reference is not copied.
• The reference copied is [Frequency ref.] (FrH) (before ramp), unless the channel 2 reference is set
via +/- speed.
In this case, the reference copied is [Output frequency] (rFr) (after ramp).
Note: Copying the control and/or reference can change the direction of rotation.
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
57
CtLFUnFLtCOMSUP-
[COMMAND] (CtL-) menu
rEF-
Code
SEt-
Description
Adjustment
range
drC-
M [HMI command]
LCC
I_OCtLFUn-
nO
YES
FLt-
v
v
COMSUP-
[No] (nO)
Parameter can only be accessed using a remote display terminal, and for [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) =
[Level 1] (L1) or [Level 2] (L2), page 55.
[No] (nO): Function inactive
[Yes] (YES): Enables control of the drive using the STOP/RESET, RUN and FWD/REV buttons on the
display terminal. Here, the speed reference is given by the [HMI Frequency ref.] (LFr) parameter in the
[SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu. Only the freewheel stop, fast stop and DC injection stop commands remain
active on the terminals. If the drive/terminal connection is cut or if the terminal has not been connected,
the drive detects a fault and locks in [MODBUS FAULT] (SLF).
M [Stop Key priority]
PSt
Factory setting
[Yes] (YES)
This parameter can be used to activate or deactivate the stop button on the drive and the remote
terminals. The stop button will be deactivated if the active control channel is different from that on the
integrated display terminal or remote terminals.
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
2s
You are going to disable the stop button located on the drive and remote display.
Do not select " nO " unless exterior stopping methods exist.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.
nO
YES
v
v
[No] (nO): Function inactive
[Yes] (YES): STOP key priority
M [Rotating direction]
rOt
[Forward] (dFr)
This parameter is only visible if [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1), page 26, or [Ref.2 channel] (Fr2), page 55, are
assigned to LCC.
dFr
drS
bOt
v
v
v
Direction of operation authorized for the RUN key on the keypad or the RUN key on the remote display
terminal.
[Forward] (dFr): Forward
[Reverse] (drS): Reverse
[Both] (bOt): Both directions are authorized
M [Saving config.]
SCS
2s
2s
2s
(1)
Std
(1)
nO
See page 42.
M [Restore config.]
FCS
nO
See page 42.
M [Macro configuration]
CFG
(1)
See page 43.
(1) [Saving config.] (SCS), [Macro configuration] (CFG), and [Restore config.] (FCS) can be accessed from several configuration menus,
but they apply to all menus and parameters.
2s
58
The jog dial (ENT) needs to be pressed and held down (for 2 s) to change the assignment for this parameter.
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu
rEFSEtdrCI_OCtL-
Submenu
FUnFLtCOM-
Submenu
SUP-
The parameters can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present.
Some functions have numerous parameters. In order to clarify programming and avoid having to scroll through endless parameters, these
functions have been grouped in submenus.
PSSLike menus, submenus are identified by a dash after their code:
for example.
Note: There may be an incompatibility between functions (see the incompatibility table, page 18). In this case, the first function configured
will prevent the remainder being configured.
Code
Name/Description
b
rPCrPt
LIn
S
U
CUS
Adjustment range
Factory setting
[RAMPS]
M [Ramp type]
v
v
v
v
[Linear] (LIn)
Defines the shape of the acceleration and deceleration ramps
[Linear] (LIn): Linear
[S ramp] (S): S ramp
[U ramp] (U): U ramp
[Customized] (CUS): Customized
S ramps
f (Hz)
f (Hz)
GV
The rounding coefficient is fixed,
where t2 = 0.6 x t1
and t1 = set ramp time.
GV
0
t
t2
0
t
t2
t1
t1
U ramps
f (Hz)
f (Hz)
GV
GV
0
t2
t
The rounding coefficient is fixed,
where t2 = 0.5 x t1
and t1 = set ramp time.
0
t2
t1
t
t1
Customized ramps
f (Hz)
f (Hz)
GV
0
tA1
GV
tA2
ACC ou AC2
t
0
tA3
tA4
t
tA1: Adjustable from 0 to 100% (of ACC or AC2)
tA2: Adjustable from 0 to (100% - tA1) (of ACC or AC2)
tA3: Adjustable from 0 to 100% (of dEC or dE2)
tA4: Adjustable from 0 to (100% - tA3) (of dEC or dE2)
dEC ou dE2
59
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu
rEFSEt-
Code
Name/Description
Adjustment range
Factory
setting
0 to 100
10
drCI_O-
b
rPC-
CtL-
M [Begin Acc round]
tA1
FUnFLt-
g
COM-
tA2
SUP-
[RAMPS] (continued)
g
Parameter can be accessed if the [Ramp type] (rPt) = [Customized] (CUS), page 59.
M [End Acc round]
0 to (100-tA1)
10
Parameter can be accessed if the [Ramp type] (rPt) = [Customized] (CUS), page 59.
M [Begin Dec round]
tA3
g
0 to 100
10
Parameter can be accessed if the [Ramp type] (rPt) = [Customized] (CUS), page 59.
M [End Dec round]
tA4
g
0 to (100-tA3)
10
Parameter can be accessed if the [Ramp type] (rPt) = [Customized] (CUS), page 59.
Inr
0.01
0.1
1
M [Ramp increment]
v [0.01] (0.01): Ramp can be set between 0.05 s and 327.6 s.
v [0.1] (0.1): Ramp can be set between 0.1 s and 3,276 s.
v [1] (1): Ramp can be set between 1 s and 32,760 s (1).
0.01 - 0.1 - 1
0.1
This parameter applies to the [Acceleration] (ACC), [Deceleration] (dEC), [Acceleration 2] (AC2), and
[Deceleration 2] (dE2) parameters.
Note: Changing the [Ramp increment] (Inr) parameter causes the settings for the [Acceleration] (ACC),
[Deceleration] (dEC), [Acceleration 2] (AC2), and [Deceleration 2] (dE2) parameters to be modified as well.
ACC
dEC
M [Acceleration]
M [Deceleration]
(2)
In accordance with
Inr, page 60
3s
3s
Defined to accelerate/decelerate between 0 and the nominal frequency [Rated motor freq.] (FrS)
(parameter in the [MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu).
Check that the value for [Deceleration] (dEC) is not too low in relation to the load to be stopped.
(1) When values higher than 9,999 are displayed on the drive or on the remote display terminal, a point is inserted after the thousands digit.
Note:
This type of display can lead to confusion between values which have two digits after a decimal point and values higher than 9,999. Check
the value of the [Ramp increment] (Inr) parameter.
Example:
- If [Ramp increment] (Inr) = 0.01, the value 15.65 corresponds to a setting of 15.65 s
- If [Ramp increment] (Inr) = 1, the value 15.65 corresponds to a setting of 15,650 s
(2) Parameter can also be accessed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
g
60
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu
rEF-
Code
Name/Description
b
rPC-
Adjustment range
drC-
[RAMPS] (continued)
I_O-
M [Ramp switch ass.]
rPS
SEt-
Factory
setting
CtL-
[No] (nO)
FUn-
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
This function remains active regardless of the control channel.
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logic input LI1
[LI2] (LI2): Logic input LI2
[LI3] (LI3): Logic input LI3
[LI4] (LI4): Logic input LI4
[LI5] (LI5): Not applicable
[LI6] (LI6): Not applicable
Cd11
Cd12
Cd13
Cd14
Cd15
v
v
v
v
v
If [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 3] (L3), the following assignments are possible:
[CD11] (CD11): Bit 11 of the control word from a communication network
[CD12] (CD12): Bit 12 of the control word from a communication network
[CD13] (CD13): Bit 13 of the control word from a communication network
[CD14] (CD14): Bit 14 of the control word from a communication network
[CD15] (CD15): Bit 15 of the control word from a communication network
FLtCOMSUP-
[Acceleration] (ACC) and [Deceleration] (dEC) are enabled when the logic input or control word bit is at state 0.
[Acceleration 2] (AC2) and [Deceleration 2] (dE2) are enabled when the logic input or control word bit is at
state 1.
M [Ramp 2 threshold]
Frt
0 to 500 Hz
0 Hz
The 2nd ramp is switched if [Ramp 2 threshold] (Frt) is not 0 (the value 0 corresponds to the inactive
function) and the output frequency is higher than [Ramp 2 threshold] (Frt).
Threshold ramp switching can be combined with switching via LI or bit as follows:
LI or bit
Frequency
Ramp
0
0
1
1
& lt; Frt
& gt; Frt
& lt; Frt
& gt; Frt
ACC, dEC
AC2, dE2
AC2, dE2
AC2, dE2
M [Acceleration 2]
AC2
(1)
In accordance with
Inr, page 60
5
Parameter can be accessed if [Ramp 2 threshold] (Frt) & gt; 0, page 61, or if [Ramp switch ass.] (rPS) is
assigned, page 61.
g
M [Deceleration 2]
dE2
(1)
In accordance with
Inr, page 60
5
Parameter can be accessed if [Ramp 2 threshold] (Frt) & gt; 0, page 61, or if [Ramp switch ass.] (rPS) is
assigned, page 61.
g
M [Dec ramp adapt.]
brA
nO
YES
v
v
[Yes] (YES)
Activating this function automatically adapts the deceleration ramp, if this has been set at too low a value
for the inertia of the load.
[No] (nO): Function inactive
[Yes] (YES): Function active. The function is incompatible with applications requiring:
• Positioning on a ramp
• The use of a braking resistor (the resistor would not operate correctly)
[Dec ramp adapt.] (brA) is forced to [No] (nO) if brake control [Brake assignment] (bLC) is assigned, page 81.
(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
61
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu
rEFSEt-
Code
Name/Description
drCI_O-
b
StC-
CtL-
FLt-
rMP
FSt
nSt
dCI
COMSUP-
FSt
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
Cd11
Cd12
Cd13
Cd14
Cd15
Factory
setting
[STOP MODES]
M [Type of stop]
Stt
FUn-
Adjustment
range
v
v
v
v
[Ramp stop]
(rMP)
Stop mode on disappearance of the run command or appearance of a stop command.
[Ramp stop] (rMP): On ramp
[Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop
[Freewheel] (nST): Freewheel stop
[DC injection] (dCI): DC injection stop
M [Fast stop]
v [No] (nO): Not assigned
v [LI1] (LI1): Logic input LI1
v [LI2] (LI2): Logic input LI2
v [LI3] (LI3): Logic input LI3
v [LI4] (LI4): Logic input LI4
v [LI5] (LI5): Not applicable
v [LI6] (LI6): Not applicable
v
v
v
v
v
[No] (nO)
If [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 3] (L3), the following assignments are possible:
[CD11] (CD11): Bit 11 of the control word from a communication network
[CD12] (CD12): Bit 12 of the control word from a communication network
[CD13] (CD13): Bit 13 of the control word from a communication network
[CD14] (CD14): Bit 14 of the control word from a communication network
[CD15] (CD15): Bit 15 of the control word from a communication network
The stop is activated when the logic state of the input changes to 0 and the control word bit changes to 1.
The fast stop is a stop on a reduced ramp via the [Ramp divider] (dCF) parameter. If the input falls back
to state 1 and the run command is still active, the motor will only restart if 2-wire level control has been
configured [2/3 wire control] (tCC) = [2 wire] (2C), and [2 wire type] (tCt) = [Level] (LEL) or [Fwd priority]
(PFO), page 44. In other cases, a new run command must be sent.
dCF
g
g
62
M [Ramp divider]
0 to 10
4
Parameter can be accessed when [Type of stop] (Stt) = [Fast stop] (FSt), page 62, and when [Fast stop]
(FSt) is not [No] (nO), page 62.
Ensure that the reduced ramp is not too low in relation to the load to be stopped.
The value 0 corresponds to the minimum ramp.
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu
rEF-
Code
Name/Description
b
StC-
Adjustment
range
drC-
[STOP MODES] (continued)
I_O-
M [DC injection assign.]
dCI
SEt-
Factory
setting
CtL-
[No] (nO)
FUn-
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Note 1: This function is incompatible with the " Brake control " function (see page 18).
Note 2: The DC injection stop is not effective when the drive is stopped with the JOG function activated.
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logic input LI1
[LI2] (LI2): Logic input LI2
[LI3] (LI3): Logic input LI3
[LI4] (LI4): Logic input LI4
[LI5] (LI5): Not applicable
[LI6] (LI6): Not applicable
Cd11
Cd12
Cd13
Cd14
Cd15
v
v
v
v
v
If [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 3] (L3), the following assignments are possible:
[CD11] (CD11): Bit 11 of the control word from a communication network
[CD12] (CD12): Bit 12 of the control word from a communication network
[CD13] (CD13): Bit 13 of the control word from a communication network
[CD14] (CD14): Bit 14 of the control word from a communication network
[CD15] (CD15): Bit 15 of the control word from a communication network
FLtCOMSUP-
Braking is activated when the logic state of the input or control word bit is at 1.
WARNING
NO HOLDING TORQUE
• DC injection braking does not provide any holding torque at zero speed.
• DC injection braking does not work when there is a loss of power or when the drive detects
a fault.
• Where necessary, use a separate brake to maintain torque levels.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.
IdC
g
M [DC inject. level 1]
(1)(3)
0 to In (2)
0.7 In (2)
Parameter can be accessed if [Type of stop] (Stt) = [DC injection] (dCI), page 62, or if [DC injection assign.]
(dCI) is not set to [No] (nO), page 63.
After 5 seconds, the injection current is limited to 0.5 [Mot. therm. current] (ItH) if set to a higher value.
CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO MOTOR
• Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
(2) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.
(3) Note: These settings are not related to the " automatic standstill DC injection " function.
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
63
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu
Code
Name/Description
b
StC-
Adjustment
range
g
0.1 to 30 s
0.5 s
[STOP MODES] (continued)
M [DC injection time 2]
tdC
Factory
setting
(1)(2)
Parameter can be accessed if [Type of stop] (Stt) = [DC injection] (dCI) , page 62.
CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO MOTOR
• Long periods of DC injection braking can cause overheating and damage the motor.
• Protect the motor by avoiding long periods of DC injection braking.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
nSt
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
M [Freewheel stop ass.]
v [No] (nO): Not assigned
v [LI1] (LI1): Logic input LI1
v [LI2] (LI2): Logic input LI2
v [LI3] (LI3): Logic input LI3
v [LI4] (LI4): Logic input LI4
v [LI5] (LI5): Not applicable
v [LI6] (LI6): Not applicable
[No] (nO)
The stop is activated when the logic state of the input is at 0. If the input falls back to state 1 and the run
command is still active, the motor will only restart if 2-wire level control has been configured. In other cases,
a new run command must be sent.
(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
(2)Note: These settings are not related to the " automatic standstill DC injection " function.
g
64
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu
rEF-
Code
Name/Description
b
AdC-
Adjustment
range
drC-
[AUTO DC INJECTION]
I_O-
M [Auto DC injection]
AdC
SEt-
Factory
setting
CtL-
[Yes] (YES)
FUn-
If set to [Continuous] (Ct), this parameter causes injection current to be generated, even when there is no
run command. This is not compatible with [Auto tuning] (tUn) = [Drv running] (rUn). This parameter can
be changed at any time.
FLtCOM-
DANGER
SUP-
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
When [Auto DC injection] (AdC) = [Continuous] (Ct), the injection of current is done even if a run
command has not been sent.
• Check this action will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
NO HOLDING TORQUE
• DC injection braking does not provide any holding torque at zero speed.
• DC injection braking does not work when there is a loss of power or when the drive detects
a fault.
• Where necessary, use a separate brake to maintain torque levels.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.
nO
YES
Ct
tdC1
g
v
v
v
[No] (nO): No injection
[Yes] (YES): Standstill injection for adjustable period
[Continuous] (Ct): Continuous standstill injection
M [Auto DC inj. time 1]
(1)
0.1 to 30 s
0.5 s
Parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is not set to [No] (nO), page 65.
CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO MOTOR
• Long periods of DC injection braking can cause overheating and damage the motor.
• Protect the motor by avoiding long periods of DC injection braking.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
SdC1
g
(1)
M [Auto DC inj. level 1]
0 to 1.2 In (2)
0.7 In (2)
Parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is not set to [No] (nO), page 65.
CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO MOTOR
• Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
(2) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
65
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu
rEFSEt-
Code
Name/Description
Adjustment
range
drCI_O-
b
AdC-
CtL-
tdC2
FUn-
g
FLt-
Factory
setting
0 to 30 s
0s
[AUTO DC INJECTION] (continued)
M [Auto DC inj. time 2]
(1)
Parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is not set to [No] (nO), page 65.
CAUTION
COM-
RISK OF DAMAGE TO MOTOR
SUP-
• Long periods of DC injection braking can cause overheating and damage the motor.
• Protect the motor by avoiding long periods of DC injection braking.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
SdC2
g
M [Auto DC inj. level 2]
(1)
0 to 1.2 In (2)
0.5 In (2)
Parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is not set to [No] (nO), page 65.
CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO MOTOR
• Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
AdC
SdC2
YES
x
Ct
0
Ct
Operation
=0
Run command
Speed
(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
(2) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.
g
66
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu
rEF-
Code
Name/Description
b
SAI-
Adjustment
range
SEt-
Factory
setting
drC-
[SUMMING INPUTS]
I_O-
Can be used to sum one or two inputs to the [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) reference only.
Note: The " Summing inputs " function may be incompatible with other functions (see page 18).
SA2
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
AIU1
M [Summing ref. 2]
v [No] (nO): Not assigned
v [AI1] (AI1): Not applicable
v [AI2] (AI2): Analog input AI2
v [AI3] (AI3): Analog input AI3
v [AI Virtual 1] (AIV1): Jog dial
LCC
v
Ndb
nEt
v
v
SA3
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
AIU1
v
Ndb
nEt
v
v
FUn-
[AI2] (AI2) (1)
FLtCOMSUP-
If [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 3] (L3), the following assignments are possible:
[HMI] (LCC): Reference via the remote display terminal, [HMI Frequency ref.] (LFr) parameter in the
[SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu, page 29.
[Modbus] (Mdb): Not applicable
[Com. card] (nEt): Reference via network
M [Summing ref. 3]
v [No] (nO): Not assigned
v [AI1] (AI1): Not applicable
v [AI2] (AI2): Analog input AI2
v [AI3] (AI3): Analog input AI3
v [AI Virtual 1] (AIV1): Jog dial
LCC
CtL-
[No] (nO)
If [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 3] (L3), the following assignments are possible:
[HMI] (LCC): Reference via the remote display terminal, [HMI Frequency ref.] (LFr) parameter in the
[SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu, page 29.
[Modbus] (Mdb): Not applicable
[Com. card] (nEt): Reference via network
(1) When using X2X, the factory setting is changed automatically to [No] (nO).
Summing inputs
Note:
AI2 is a ± 10 V input which can be used for subtraction by summing a
negative signal.
See the complete block diagrams on pages 50 and 52.
67
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu
rEFSEtdrCI_O-
Preset speeds
2, 4, 8 or 16 speeds can be preset, requiring 1, 2, 3 or 4 logic inputs respectively.
The following assignment order must be observed: [2 preset speeds] (PS2), then [4 preset speeds] (PS4), then [8 preset speeds] (PS8),
then [16 preset speeds] (PS16).
FUnCtL-
FLt-
Combination table for preset speed inputs
COM-
16 speeds
LI (PS16)
8 speeds
LI (PS8)
4 speeds
LI (PS4)
2 speeds
LI (PS2)
Speed reference
0
0
0
0
Reference (1)
0
0
0
1
SP2
0
0
1
0
SP3
0
0
1
1
SP4
0
1
0
0
SP5
0
1
0
1
SP6
0
1
1
0
SP7
0
1
1
1
SP8
1
0
0
0
SP9
1
0
0
1
SP10
1
0
1
0
SP11
1
0
1
1
SP12
1
1
0
0
SP13
1
1
0
1
SP14
1
1
1
0
SP15
1
SUP-
1
1
1
SP16
(1) See the block diagrams on page 50 and page 52: Reference 1 = (SP1).
Note: If Fr1 = LCC and rPI= nO, then PI reference (%) = 10 * AI (Hz) / 15
68
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu
rEF-
Code
PSS-
Name/Description
b
Adjustment
range
SEt-
Factory setting
drC-
[PRESET SPEEDS]
I_OCtL-
Note 1: The " Preset speeds " function may be incompatible with other functions (see page 18).
Note 2: This function can only be used with 8I64*******.00C-1 references.
PS2
M [2 preset speeds]
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
[LI3] (LI3) (1)
FLt-
Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function.
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logic input LI1
[LI2] (LI2): Logic input LI2
[LI3] (LI3): Logic input LI3
[LI4] (LI4): Logic input LI4
[LI5] (LI5): Not applicable
[LI6] (LI6): Not applicable
Cd11
Cd12
Cd13
Cd14
Cd15
FUn-
If [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 3] (L3), the following assignments are possible:
[CD11] (CD11): Bit 11 of the control word from a communication network
[CD12] (CD12): Bit 12 of the control word from a communication network
[CD13] (CD13): Bit 13 of the control word from a communication network
[CD14] (CD14): Bit 14 of the control word from a communication network
[CD15] (CD15): Bit 15 of the control word from a communication network
PS4
M [4 preset speeds]
COMSUP-
[LI4] (LI4) (1)
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function.
Ensure that [2 preset speeds] (PS2) has been assigned before assigning [4 preset speeds] (PS4).
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logic input LI1
[LI2] (LI2): Logic input LI2
[LI3] (LI3): Logic input LI3
[LI4] (LI4): Logic input LI4
[LI5] (LI5): Not applicable
[LI6] (LI6): Not applicable
Cd11
Cd12
Cd13
Cd14
Cd15
v
v
v
v
v
If [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 3] (L3), the following assignments are possible:
[CD11] (CD11): Bit 11 of the control word from a communication network
[CD12] (CD12): Bit 12 of the control word from a communication network
[CD13] (CD13): Bit 13 of the control word from a communication network
[CD14] (CD14): Bit 14 of the control word from a communication network
[CD15] (CD15): Bit 15 of the control word from a communication network
PS8
M [8 preset speeds]
[No] (nO)
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function.
Ensure that [4 preset speeds] (PS4) has been assigned before assigning [8 preset speeds] (PS8).
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logic input LI1
[LI2] (LI2): Logic input LI2
[LI3] (LI3): Logic input LI3
[LI4] (LI4): Logic input LI4
[LI5] (LI5): Not applicable
[LI6] (LI6): Not applicable
Cd11
Cd12
Cd13
Cd14
Cd15
v
v
v
v
v
If [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 3] (L3), the following assignments are possible:
[CD11] (CD11): Bit 11 of the control word from a communication network
[CD12] (CD12): Bit 12 of the control word from a communication network
[CD13] (CD13): Bit 13 of the control word from a communication network
[CD14] (CD14): Bit 14 of the control word from a communication network
[CD15] (CD15): Bit 15 of the control word from a communication network
(1) When using X2X, the factory setting is changed automatically to [No] (nO).
69
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu
rEFSEt-
Code
Name/Description
Adjustment
range
drCI_O-
b
PSS-
CtL-
PS16
FUn-
Factory
setting
[PRESET SPEEDS] (continued)
M [16 preset speeds]
[No] (nO)
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function.
Ensure that [8 preset speeds] (PS8) has been assigned before assigning [16 preset speeds] (PS16).
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logic input LI1
[LI2] (LI2): Logic input LI2
[LI3] (LI3): Logic input LI3
[LI4] (LI4): Logic input LI4
[LI5] (LI5): Not applicable
[LI6] (LI6): Not applicable
Cd11
Cd12
Cd13
Cd14
Cd15
v
v
v
v
v
If [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 3] (L3), the following assignments are possible:
[CD11] (CD11): Bit 11 of the control word from a communication network
[CD12] (CD12): Bit 12 of the control word from a communication network
[CD13] (CD13): Bit 13 of the control word from a communication network
[CD14] (CD14): Bit 14 of the control word from a communication network
[CD15] (CD15): Bit 15 of the control word from a communication network
FLtCOMSUP-
SP2
M [Preset speed 2]
(1)
0.0 to 500.0 Hz (2) 10 Hz
SP3
M [Preset speed 3]
(1)
0.0 to 500.0 Hz (2) 15 Hz
SP4
M [Preset speed 4]
(1)
0.0 to 500.0 Hz (2) 20 Hz
SP5
M [Preset speed 5]
(1)
0.0 to 500.0 Hz (2) 25 Hz
SP6
M [Preset speed 6]
(1)
0.0 to 500.0 Hz (2) 30 Hz
SP7
M [Preset speed 7]
(1)
0.0 to 500.0 Hz (2) 35 Hz
SP8
M [Preset speed 8]
(1)
0.0 to 500.0 Hz (2) 40 Hz
SP9
M [Preset speed 9]
(1)
0.0 to 500.0 Hz (2) 45 Hz
M [Preset speed 10]
(1)
0.0 to 500.0 Hz (2) 50 Hz
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
SP10
g
(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu. This parameter will depend on how many speeds have been
configured.
(2) Reminder: The speed remains limited by the [High speed] (HSP) parameter, page 30.
g
70
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu
rEF-
Code
Name/Description
b
PSS-
Adjustment
range
SEt-
Factory
setting
drC-
[PRESET SPEEDS] (continued)
I_O-
SP11
M [Preset speed 11]
(1)
SP12
M [Preset speed 12]
(1)
0.0 to 500.0 Hz (2) 60 Hz
SP13
M [Preset speed 13]
(1)
0.0 to 500.0 Hz (2) 70 Hz
SP14
M [Preset speed 14]
(1)
0.0 to 500.0 Hz (2) 80 Hz
SP15
M [Preset speed 15]
(1)
0.0 to 500.0 Hz (2) 90 Hz
SP16
M [Preset speed 16]
(1)
CtL-
0.0 to 500.0 Hz (2) 100 Hz
g
0.0 to 500.0 Hz (2) 55 Hz
FUnFLt-
g
SUP-
g
g
g
g
COM-
(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu. This parameter will depend on how many speeds have been
configured.
(2) Reminder: The speed remains limited by the [High speed] (HSP) parameter, page 30.
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
71
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu
rEFSEt-
Code
Name/Description
Adjustment
range
drCI_O-
b
JOG-
Factory setting
[JOG]
Note: The " Jog operation " function may be incompatible with other functions (see page 18).
CtLFUn-
M [JOG]
JOG
FLt-
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
COMSUP-
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
[No] (nO)
Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function.
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logic input LI1
[LI2] (LI2): Logic input LI2
[LI3] (LI3): Logic input LI3
[LI4] (LI4): Logic input LI4
[LI5] (LI5): Not applicable
[LI6] (LI6): Not applicable
Example: 2-wire control operation ([2/3 wire control] (tCC) = [2 wire] (2C))
Motor
frequency
Ramp dEC/dE2 Ramp forced to 0.1 s
Reference
JGF reference
JGF reference
LI (JOG)
u 0.5 s
Forward
Reverse
JGF
g
M [Jog frequency] (1)
0 to 10 Hz
10 Hz
Parameter can be accessed if [JOG] (JOG) is not set to [No] (nO), page 72.
(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
g
72
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu
rEFSEt-
+/- speed
drC-
Function can only be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 2] (L2) or [Level 3] (L3), page 55.
Two types of operation are available.
I_OCtL-
1. Use of single action buttons: Two logic inputs are required in addition to the direction(s) of operation.
The input assigned to the " + speed " command increases the speed, the input assigned to the " - speed " command decreases
the speed.
Note:
If the " + speed " and " - speed " commands are activated at the same time, " - speed " will be given priority.
FUnFLtCOM-
2. Use of double action buttons: Only one logic input assigned to " + speed " is required.
Description: 1 button pressed twice for each direction of rotation. Each action closes a contact.
Released
(- speed)
1st press
(speed maintained)
2nd press
(+ speed)
Forward button
–
a
a and b
Reverse button
–
c
SUP-
c and d
Wiring example:
LI1: Forward
LIx: Reverse
LIy: + speed
ACOPOSinverter X64
control terminals
Motor frequency
LSP
0
LSP
Forward
2nd press
1st press
0
Reverse
2nd press
1st press
0
This type of +/- speed is incompatible with 3-wire control.
Whichever type of operation is selected, the max. speed is set by the [High speed] (HSP) parameter, page 30.
Note:
If the reference is switched via [Ref. 2 switching] (rFC), page 56, from one reference channel to any other reference channel with " +/- speed " ,
the value of the [Output frequency] (rFr) reference (after ramp) is copied at the same time. This prevents the speed being incorrectly reset
to zero when switching takes place.
73
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu
rEFSEtdrC-
Code
Name/Description
I_OCtL-
b
UPd-
FUn-
Adjustment
range
Factory
setting
[+/- SPEED]
(motorized jog dial)
Function can only be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 2] (L2) or [Level 3] (L3), and [+/-spd HMI]
(UPdH) or [+/- SPEED] (UPdt) selected, page 55.
FLtCOM-
Note: The " +/- speed " function is incompatible with several functions (see page 18). It can only be configured
if these functions are unassigned, in particular the summing inputs (set [Summing ref. 2] (SA2) to [No] (nO),
page 67) and the preset speeds (set [2 preset speeds] (PS2) and [4 preset speeds] (PS4) to [No] (nO),
page 69) which will have been assigned as part of the factory settings.
SUP-
M [+ speed assignment]
USP
g
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
g
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
g
nO
rAN
EEP
74
v
v
v
[No] (nO)
Parameter accessible for [+/- SPEED] (UPdt) only. Selecting the assigned logic input activates the
function.
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logic input LI1
[LI2] (LI2): Logic input LI2
[LI3] (LI3): Logic input LI3
[LI4] (LI4): Logic input LI4
[LI5] (LI5): Not applicable
[LI6] (LI6): Not applicable
M [Reference saved]
Str
g
Parameter accessible for [+/- SPEED] (UPdt) only. Selecting the assigned logic input activates the
function.
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logic input LI1
[LI2] (LI2): Logic input LI2
[LI3] (LI3): Logic input LI3
[LI4] (LI4): Logic input LI4
[LI5] (LI5): Not applicable
[LI6] (LI6): Not applicable
M [-Speed assignment]
dSP
[No] (nO)
[No] (nO)
Associated with the " +/- speed " function, this parameter can be used to save the reference:
• When the run commands disappear (saved to RAM)
• When the line supply or the run commands disappear (saved to EEPROM)
Therefore, the next time the drive starts up, the speed reference is the last reference saved.
[No] (nO): No saving
[RAM] (rAM): Saving in RAM
[EEprom] (EEP): Saving in EEPROM
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu
rEF-
PI regulator
SEt-
Note: This function can only be used with 8I64*******.00C-1 references.
drC-
Block diagram
I_O-
The function is activated by assigning an analog input to the PI feedback (measurement).
CtLFUnFLtCOMSUP-
Pages 50 and 52
Pages 50 and 52
PI feedback:
PI feedback must be assigned to one of these analog inputs, AI2 or AI3.
PI reference:
The PI reference can be assigned to the following parameters in order of priority:
- Preset references via logic inputs, [Preset ref. PID 2] (rP2), [Preset ref. PID 3] (rP3), and [Preset ref. PID 4] (rP4), page 78
- Internal reference [Internal PID ref.] (rPI), page 79
- Reference [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1), page 55
Combination table for preset PI references
LI (Pr4)
LI (Pr2)
Pr2 = nO
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Reference
rPI or Fr1
rPI or Fr1
rP2
rP3
rP4
Parameters can also be accessed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu:
• [Internal PID ref.] (rPI), page 29
• [Preset ref. PID 2] (rP2), [Preset ref. PID 3] (rP3), and [Preset ref. PID 4] (rP4), page 33
• [PID prop. gain] (rPG), page 33
• [PID integral gain] (rIG), page 33
• [PID fbk scale factor] (FbS), page 33:
The [PID fbk scale factor] (FbS) parameter can be used to scale the reference according to the variation range for PI feedback (sensor
rating).
Example: Regulating pressure
PI reference (process) 0-5 bar (0-100%)
Rating of pressure sensor 0-10 bar
[PID fbk scale factor] (FbS) = max. sensor scaling/max. process
[PID fbk scale factor] (FbS) = 10/5= 2
• [PID wake up thresh.] (rSL), page 35:
Can be used to set the PI error threshold above which the PI regulator will be reactivated (wake-up) after a stop due to the max. time
threshold being exceeded at low speed [Low speed time out] (tLS)
• [PID correct. reverse] (PIC), page 33: If [PID correct. reverse] (PIC) = [No] (nO), the speed of the motor will increase when the error
is positive (example: pressure control with a compressor). If [PID correct. reverse] (PIC) = [Yes] (YES), the speed of the motor will
decrease when the error is positive (example: temperature control using a cooling fan).
75
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu
rEFSEt-
" Manual - Automatic " operation with PI
drC-
This function combines the PI regulator and [Ref. 2 switching] (rFC) reference switching, page 56. The speed reference is given by
[Ref.2 channel] (Fr2) or by the PI function, depending on the state of the logic input.
I_OCtL-
Setting up the PI regulator
1. Configuration in PI mode
See the block diagram on page 75.
FLt2. Perform a test in factory settings mode (in most cases, this will be sufficient).
COMTo optimize the drive, adjust [PID prop. gain.] (rPG) or [PID integral gain] (rIG) gradually and independently, and observe the effect on
the PI feedback in relation to the reference.
SUP- 3. If the factory settings are unstable or the reference is incorrect:
Perform a test with a speed reference in manual mode (without PI regulator) and with the drive on load for the speed range of the system:
- In steady state, the speed must be stable and comply with the reference, and the PI feedback signal must be stable.
- In transient state, the speed must follow the ramp and stabilize quickly, and the PI feedback must follow the speed.
If this is not the case, see the settings for the drive and/or sensor signal and cabling.
FUn-
Switch to PI mode.
Set [Dec ramp adapt.] (brA) to no (no auto-adaptation of the ramp).
Set the [Acceleration] (ACC) and [Deceleration] (dEC) speed ramps to the minimum level permitted by the mechanics without triggering an
[OVERBRAKING] (ObF) fault.
Set the integral gain [PID integral gain] (rIG) to the minimum level.
Observe the PI feedback and the reference.
Switch the drive ON/OFF repeatedly or quickly vary the load or reference a number of times.
Set the proportional gain [PID prop. gain] (rPG) in order to ascertain a good compromise between response time and stability in transient
phases (slight overshoot and 1 to 2 oscillations before stabilizing).
If the reference varies from the preset value in steady state, gradually increase the integral gain [PID integral gain] (rIG), reduce the
proportional gain [PID prop. gain] (rPG) in the event of instability (pump applications), and find a compromise between response time and
static precision (see diagram).
Perform in-production tests over the whole reference range.
Stabilization time
Regulated
value
rPG high
Reference
Overshoot
Static error
Proportional
gain
rPG low
Rise time
Time
rIG high
Reference
Integral
gain
rIG low
Reference
Time
rPG and rIG correct
Time
The oscillation frequency depends on the system dynamics.
Parameter
Rise time
Overshoot
Stabilization
time
[PID prop. gain] (rPG)
=
[PID integral gain] (rIG)
76
Static error
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu
rEF-
Code
Name/Description
b
PI-
Adjustment
range
SEt-
Factory
setting
drC-
[PI REGULATOR]
I_OCtL-
Note: The " PI regulator " function is incompatible with several functions (see page 18).
It can only be configured if these functions are unassigned, in particular the summing inputs (set [Summing
ref. 2] (SA2) to [No] (nO), page 67) and the preset speeds (set [2 preset speeds] (PS2) and [4 preset speeds]
(PS4) to [No] (nO), page 69) which will have been assigned as part of the factory settings.
PIF
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
M [PID feedback ass.]
v [No] (nO): Not assigned
v [AI1] (AI1): Not applicable
v [AI2] (AI2): Analog input AI2
v [AI3] (AI3): Analog input AI3
M [PID prop. gain]
rPG
FUnFLt-
[No] (nO)
COMSUP-
(1)
0.01 to 100
1
Parameter is only visible if [PID feedback ass.] (PIF) is not set to [No] (nO), page 77.
It provides dynamic performance when PI feedback is changing quickly.
g
M [PID integral gain]
rIG
(1)
0.01 to 100
1
Parameter is only visible if [PID feedback ass.] (PIF) is not set to [No] (nO), page 77.
It provides static precision when PI feedback is changing slowly.
g
M [PID fbk scale factor]
FbS
(1)
0.1 to 100
1
Parameter is only visible if [PID feedback ass.] (PIF) is not set to [No] (nO), page 77.
For adapting the process.
g
M [PID correct. reverse]
PIC
g
[No] (nO)
Parameter is only visible if [PID feedback ass.] (PIF) is not set to [No] (nO), page 77.
nO
YES
v
v
[No] (nO): Normal
[Yes] (YES): Reverse
M [2 preset PID ref.]
Pr2
g
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Parameter is only visible if [PID feedback ass.] (PIF) is not set to [No] (nO), page 77.
Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function.
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logic input LI1
[LI2] (LI2): Logic input LI2
[LI3] (LI3): Logic input LI3
[LI4] (LI4): Logic input LI4
[LI5] (LI5): Not applicable
[LI6] (LI6): Not applicable
Cd11
Cd12
Cd13
Cd14
Cd15
v
v
v
v
v
[No] (nO)
If [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 3] (L3), the following assignments are possible:
[CD11] (CD11): Bit 11 of the control word from a communication network
[CD12] (CD12): Bit 12 of the control word from a communication network
[CD13] (CD13): Bit 13 of the control word from a communication network
[CD14] (CD14): Bit 14 of the control word from a communication network
[CD15] (CD15): Bit 15 of the control word from a communication network
(1) Parameter(s) can also be accessed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
77
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu
rEFSEt-
Code
Name/Description
Adjustment
range
drCI_O-
b
PI-
CtL-
[PI REGULATOR] (continued)
M [4 preset PID ref.]
Pr4
FUn-
Factory
setting
g
[No] (nO)
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Parameter is only visible if [PID feedback ass.] (PIF) is not set to [No] (nO), page 77.
Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function.
Make sure that [2 preset PID ref.] (Pr2), page 77, has been assigned before assigning [4 preset PID ref.]
(Pr4).
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logic input LI1
[LI2] (LI2): Logic input LI2
[LI3] (LI3): Logic input LI3
[LI4] (LI4): Logic input LI4
[LI5] (LI5): Not applicable
[LI6] (LI6): Not applicable
Cd11
Cd12
Cd13
Cd14
Cd15
FLt-
v
v
v
v
v
If [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 3] (L3), the following assignments are possible:
[CD11] (CD11): Bit 11 of the control word from a communication network
[CD12] (CD12): Bit 12 of the control word from a communication network
[CD13] (CD13): Bit 13 of the control word from a communication network
[CD14] (CD14): Bit 14 of the control word from a communication network
[CD15] (CD15): Bit 15 of the control word from a communication network
COMSUP-
rP2
M [Preset ref. PID 2]
g
M [Preset ref. PID 3]
g
M [Preset ref. PID 4]
g
30%
(1)
0 to 100%
60%
(1)
0 to 100%
90%
See page 33.
rP4
0 to 100%
See page 33.
rP3
(1)
See page 33.
(1) Parameter(s) can also be accessed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
g
78
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu
rEF-
Code
Name/Description
b
PI-
Adjustment
range
drCI_O-
[PI REGULATOR] (continued)
CtL-
M [PID wake up thresh.]
rSL
SEt-
Factory
setting
(1)
0 to 100%
0%
FUn-
If the " PI " and " Low speed operating time " [Low speed time out] (tLS) (page 35) are configured at the same
time, the PI regulator may attempt to set a speed lower than [Low speed] (LSP).
This results in unsatisfactory operation, which consists of starting, operating at [Low speed] (LSP), then
stopping, and so on.
The rSL (restart error threshold) parameter can be used to set a minimum PI error threshold
for restarting after a stop at prolonged [Low speed] (LSP).
The function is inactive if [Low speed time out] (tLS) = 0.
g
FLtCOMSUP-
DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• Check that unintended restarts will not present any danger.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
M [Act. internal PID ref.]
PII
g
nO
v
YES
v
rPI
g
[No] (nO)
[No] (nO): The reference for the PI regulator is [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1), except for [+/-spd HMI] (UPdH) and
[+/- SPEED] (UPdt) (+/- speed cannot be used as a reference for the PI regulator).
[Yes] (YES): The reference for the PI regulator is provided internally via the [Internal PID ref.] (rPI)
parameter.
M [Internal PID ref.]
(1)
0 to 100%
0%
Parameter is only visible if [PID feedback ass.] (PIF) is not set to [No] (nO), page 77.
(1) Parameter(s) can also be accessed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
79
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu
Brake control
Function can only be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 2] (L2) or [Level 3] (L3) (page 50).
This function, which can be assigned to relay R2 or logic output dO, enables the drive to manage an electromagnetic brake.
Principle
Synchronize brake release with the build-up of torque during startup and brake engage at zero speed on stopping, to help prevent jolting.
Brake sequence
Motor speed
Speed reference
Relay R2 or logic output dO
Settings which can be accessed in the
application functions [APPLICATION
FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu:
• Brake release frequency [Brake
release freq] (brL)
• Brake release current
[Brake release I FW] (Ibr)
• Brake release time delay [Brake
Release time] (brt)
• Brake engage frequency [Brake
engage freq] (bEn)
• Brake engage time delay [Brake
engage time] (bEt)
• Brake release pulse [Brake
impulse] (bIP)
Motor current
Motor frequency
Speed reference
LI forward or reverse
State of brake
Engaged
Released
Engaged
Recommended brake control settings:
1. [Brake release freq] (brL), page 81:
- Horizontal movement: Set to 0
- Vertical movement: Set to a frequency equal to the nominal motor slip in Hz
2. [Brake release I FW] (Ibr), page 81:
- Horizontal movement: Set to 0
- Vertical movement: Preset the nominal current of the motor then adjust it in order to help prevent jolting on start-up, making sure
that the maximum load is held when the brake is released.
3. [Brake Release time] (brt), page 81:
Adjust according to the type of brake. It is the time required for the mechanical brake to release.
4. [Brake engage freq] (bEn), page 81:
- Horizontal movement: Set to 0
- Vertical movement: Set to a frequency equal to the nominal motor slip in Hz. Note: Max. [Brake engage freq] (bEn) = [Low speed]
(LSP); this means an appropriate value must be set in advance for [Low speed] (LSP).
5. [Brake engage time] (bEt), page 81:
Adjust according to the type of brake. It is the time required for the mechanical brake to engage.
6. [Brake impulse] (bIP), page 81:
- Horizontal movement: Set to [No] (nO)
- Vertical movement: Set to [Yes] (YES) and check that the motor torque direction for " run forward " control corresponds to the
upward direction of the load. If necessary, reverse two motor phases. This parameter generates motor torque in an upward
direction regardless of the direction of operation commanded in order to maintain the load whilst the brake is releasing.
80
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu
rEF-
Code
Name/Description
b
bLC-
Adjustment
range
SEt-
Factory
setting
drC-
[BRAKE LOGIC CONTROL]
I_O-
Function can only be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 2] (L2) or [Level 3] (L3), page 55.
Note: This function may be incompatible with other functions (see page 18).
bLC
nO
r2
dO
M [Brake assignment]
v [No] (nO): Not assigned
v [R2] (r2): Relay R2
v [DO] (dO): Logic output dO
CtLFUn-
[No] (nO)
FLtCOMSUP-
If [Brake assignment] (bLC) is assigned, the [Catch on the fly] (FLr) parameter, page 89, and the [Dec ramp
adapt.] (brA) parameter, page 61, are forced to [No] (nO), and the [Output Phase Loss] (OPL) parameter,
page 90, is forced to [Yes] (YES).
[Brake assignment] (bLC) is forced to [No] (nO) if [Output Phase Loss] (OPL) = [Output cut] (OAC), page 90.
Note: At the Automation Studio the parameter r2/dO has to be set to bLC, when bLC = r2/dO.
M [Brake release freq]
brL
g
In accordance
with the drive
rating
0 to 1.36 In (1)
In accordance
with the drive
rating
0 to 5 s
0.5 s
0 to HSP
(page 30)
0 LSP
Brake release frequency.
M [Brake release I FW]
Ibr
g
Brake release current threshold for ascending or forward movement.
M [Brake Release time]
brt
g
Brake release time delay.
M [Low speed]
LSP
Motor frequency at min. reference.
This parameter can also be changed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu, page 30.
g
M [Brake engage freq]
bEn
g
nO
0
to
LSP
v
v
g
nO - 0 to LSP
nO
Not set
Adjustment range in Hz
If [Brake assignment] (bLC) is assigned and [Brake engage freq] (bEn) remains set to [No] (nO), the drive
will lock in [BRAKE CONTROL FAULT] (bLF) mode on the first run command.
M [Brake engage time]
bEt
0 to 5 s
0.5 s
Brake engage time (brake response time).
bIP
nO
YES
g
0.0 to 10.0 Hz
[No] (nO)
M [Brake impulse]
v [No] (nO): Whilst the brake is releasing, the motor torque direction corresponds to the direction of rotation
v
commanded.
[Yes] (YES): Whilst the brake is releasing, the motor torque direction is forward, regardless of the direction
of operation commanded.
Note: Check that the motor torque direction for " run forward " control corresponds to the upward direction of
the load. If necessary, reverse two motor phases.
(1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
81
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu
rEFSEt-
Code
Name/Description
Adjustment
range
drCI_O-
b
LC2-
CtL-
Factory
setting
[CURRENT LIMITATION 2]
Function can only be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 2] (L2) or [Level 3] (L3), page 55.
FUn-
M [Current limit 2]
LC2
FLt-
[No] (nO)
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
SUP-
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function.
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logic input LI1
[LI2] (LI2): Logic input LI2
[LI3] (LI3): Logic input LI3
[LI4] (LI4): Logic input LI4
[LI5] (LI5): Not applicable
[LI6] (LI6): Not applicable
Cd11
Cd12
Cd13
Cd14
Cd15
COM-
v
v
v
v
v
If [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 3] (L3), the following assignments are possible:
[CD11] (CD11): Bit 11 of the control word from a communication network
[CD12] (CD12): Bit 12 of the control word from a communication network
[CD13] (CD13): Bit 13 of the control word from a communication network
[CD14] (CD14): Bit 14 of the control word from a communication network
[CD15] (CD15): Bit 15 of the control word from a communication network
[Current Limitation] (CLI) is enabled when the logic input or control word bit is at state 0 ([SETTINGS]
(SEt-) menu, page 35).
[I Limit. 2 value] (CL2) is enabled when the logic input or control word bit is at state 1.
CL2
g
M [I Limit. 2 value]
(1)
0.25 to 1.5 In (2)
1.5 In (2)
See page 35.
(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
(2) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.
g
82
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu
rEF-
Code
Name/Description
b
CHP-
Adjustment
range
SEt-
Factory setting
drC-
[SWITCHING MOTOR]
I_O-
Function can only be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 2] (L2) or [Level 3] (L3), page 55.
CHP
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
Cd11
Cd12
Cd13
Cd14
Cd15
M [Motor switching]
v [No] (nO): Not assigned
v [LI1] (LI1): Logic input LI1
v [LI2] (LI2): Logic input LI2
v [LI3] (LI3): Logic input LI3
v [LI4] (LI4): Logic input LI4
v [LI5] (LI5): Not applicable
v [LI6] (LI6): Not applicable
v
v
v
v
v
CtLFUn-
[No] (nO)
FLtCOMSUP-
If [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 3] (L3), the following assignments are possible:
[CD11] (CD11): Bit 11 of the control word from a communication network
[CD12] (CD12): Bit 12 of the control word from a communication network
[CD13] (CD13): Bit 13 of the control word from a communication network
[CD14] (CD14): Bit 14 of the control word from a communication network
[CD15] (CD15): Bit 15 of the control word from a communication network
LI or bit = 0: Motor 1
LI or bit = 1: Motor 2
Note:
• If this function is used, the auto-tuning function, page 40, is not active on motor 2.
• Changes to parameters are only taken into account when the drive is locked.
CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO MOTOR
The motor switching function disables motor thermal protection.
The use of external overload protection is required when using motor switching.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
UnS2
g
M [Nom. mot. 2 volt.]
In accordance
with the drive
rating
In accordance
with the drive
rating
10 to 500 Hz
50 Hz
8I64S2*****.00X-1: 100 to 240 V
8I64T2*****.00X-1: 100 to 240 V
8I64T4*****.00X-1: 100 to 500 V
FrS2
M [Nom. motor 2 freq.]
Note:
g
g
The ratio
[Rated motor volt.] (UnS) (in volts)
[Rated motor freq.] (FrS) (in Hz)
must not exceed the following values:
8I64S2*****.00X-1: 7 max.
8I64T2*****.00X-1: 7 max.
8I64T4*****.00X-1: 14 max.
The factory setting is 50 Hz, or preset to 60 Hz if [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) is set to 60 Hz.
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
83
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu
rEFSEt-
Code
Name/Description
Adjustment
range
0.25 to 1.5 In
(2)
drCI_O-
b
CHP-
CtL-
FLtCOM-
g
SUP-
nSP2
Nominal motor 2 current given on the rating plate.
M [Nom. mot. 2 speed]
0 to 32,760 rpm In accordance
with the drive
rating
0 to 9,999 rpm then 10.00 to 32.76 krpm
If, rather than the nominal speed, the nameplate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz or as
a %, calculate the nominal speed as follows:
100 - slip as a %
• Nominal speed = synchronous speed x
100
or
50 - slip in Hz
• Nominal speed = synchronous speed x
(50 Hz motors)
50
or
60 - slip in Hz
• Nominal speed = synchronous speed x
(60 Hz motors)
60
g
M [Motor 2 Cosinus Phi]
COS2
g
0.5 to 1
In accordance
with the drive
rating
Cos Phi given on the rating plate of motor 2.
UFt2
L
P
n
nLd
g
In accordance
with the drive
rating
[SWITCHING MOTOR] (continued)
M [Nom. mot. 2 current]
nCr2
FUn-
Factory setting
[SVC] (n)
M [U/F mot.2 selected]
v [Cst. torque] (L): Constant torque for motors connected in parallel or special motors
v [Var. torque] (P): Variable torque for pump and fan applications
v [SVC] (n): Sensorless flux vector control for constant torque applications
v [Energy sav.] (nLd): Energy saving, for variable torque applications not requiring high dynamics (behaves
in a similar way to the P ratio at no load and the n ratio on load)
Voltage
UnS
L
n
P
FrS
UFr2
M [IR compensation 2]
g
M [FreqLoopGain 2]
g
(1)
0 to 100%
20%
(1)
1 to 100%
20%
(1)
1 to 100%
20%
(1)
0 to 150%
100%
See page 35.
FLG2
Frequency
See page 36.
StA2
g
SLP2
g
M [Freq. loop stability 2]
See page 36.
M [Slip compensation 2]
See page 36.
(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
(2) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.
g
84
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu
rEFSEt-
Management of limit switches
drC-
Function can only be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 2] (L2) or [Level 3] (L3), page 55.
This function can be used to manage the operation of one or two series limit switches (non-reversing or reversing).
- Assignment of one or two logic inputs (forward limit switch, reverse limit switch)
- Selection of the stop type (on ramp, fast or freewheel)
Following a stop, the motor is permitted to restart in the opposite direction only.
- The stop is performed when the input is in state 0. The direction of operation is authorized in state 1.
I_OCtLFUnFLt-
Restarting after stop caused by a limit switch
COM• Send a run command in the other direction (when control is via the terminals, if [2/3 wire control] (tCC) = [2 wire] (2C) and [2 wire
SUPtype] (tCt) = [Transition] (trn), first remove all the run commands).
or
• Invert the reference sign, remove all the run commands then send a run command in the same direction as before the stop caused
by a limit switch.
Code
Name/Description
b
LSt-
Adjustment
range
Factory
setting
[LIMIT SWITCHES]
Function can only be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 2] (L2) or [Level 3] (L3), page 55.
Note: This function is incompatible with the " PI regulator " function (see page 18).
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
LAr
M [Stop FW limit sw.]
v [No] (nO): Not assigned
v [LI1] (LI1): Logic input LI1
v [LI2] (LI2): Logic input LI2
v [LI3] (LI3): Logic input LI3
v [LI4] (LI4): Logic input LI4
v [LI5] (LI5): Not applicable
v [LI6] (LI6): Not applicable
[No] (nO)
M [Stop RV limit sw.]
LAF
[No] (nO)
g
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
M [Stop type]
LAS
g
[Freewheel]
(nSt)
Parameter can be accessed if [Stop FW limit sw.] (LAF) or [Stop RV limit sw.] (LAr) is assigned.
rMP
FSt
nSt
g
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logic input LI1
[LI2] (LI2): Logic input LI2
[LI3] (LI3): Logic input LI3
[LI4] (LI4): Logic input LI4
[LI5] (LI5): Not applicable
[LI6] (LI6): Not applicable
v
v
v
[Ramp stop] (rMP): On ramp
[Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop
[Freewheel] (nSt): Freewheel stop
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
85
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu
rEFSEt-
Code
drCI_O-
SCS
CtLFUn-
2s
FLt-
CFG
COM-
2s
SUP-
FCS
2s
Name/Description
M [Saving config.]
Adjustment
range
Factory
setting
(1)
[No] (nO)
(1)
[Factory set.]
(Std)
(1)
[No] (nO)
See page 42.
M [Macro configuration]
See page 42.
M [Restore config.]
See page 43.
(1) [Saving config.] (SCS), [Macro configuration] (CFG), and [Restore config.] (FCS) can be accessed from several configuration menus,
but they apply to all menus and parameters.
2s
86
The jog dial (ENT) needs to be pressed and held down (for 2 s) to change the assignment for this parameter.
[FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-) menu
rEFSEtdrC-
Automatic restart
I_OCtLFUnFLtCOM-
Operating time reset to zero
SUP-
The parameters can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present.
Code
Atr
Description
Adjustment
range
M [Automatic restart]
Factory
setting
[No] (nO)
DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• The automatic restart can only be used on machines or installations which do not pose any
danger to either personnel or equipment.
• If the automatic restart is activated, the assigned fault relay will only indicate a fault has been
detected once the time-out period for the restart sequence has expired.
• The equipment must be used in compliance with national and regional safety regulations.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
nO
YES
v
v
The motor's automatic restart function will only be active in 2-wire level control ([2/3 wire control] (tCC) =
[2 wire] (2C), and [2 wire type] (tCt) = [Level] (LEL) or [Fwd priority] (PFO)).
[No] (nO): Function inactive
[Yes] (YES): Automatic restart if the fault has been cleared and the other operating conditions permit the
restart. The restart is performed by a series of automatic attempts separated by increasingly longer waiting
periods: 1 s, 5 s, 10 s, then 1 min for subsequent ones.
If the restart has not taken place once the [Max. restart time] (tAr) configurable time has elapsed, the
procedure is aborted and the drive remains locked until it is turned off and then on again.
This function is possible with the following conditions:
[NETWORK FAULT] (CnF): Communication detected fault on the communication card
[CANopen com.] (COF): CANopen communication detected fault
[External] (EPF): External fault
[4-20mA] (LFF): 4-20 mA loss
[Overbraking] (ObF): DC bus overvoltage
[Drive overheat] (OHF): Drive overheating
[Motor overload] (OLF): Motor overload
[Mot. phase] (OPF): Motor phase loss
[Mains overvoltage] (OSF): Line supply overvoltage
[Mains phase loss] (PHF): Line phase loss
If R2 is set to [No drive flt] (FLt), R2 remains activated if this function is active.
87
[FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-) menu
rEF-
Code
SEt-
Description
Adjustment
range
drC-
M [Max. restart time]
tAr
I_OCtL-
5
10
30
1h
2h
3h
Ct
FLtCOMSUP-
rSF
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
g
88
[5 min] (5)
Parameter is only visible if [Automatic restart] (Atr) = [Yes] (YES).
It can be used to limit the number of consecutive restarts in the event of a recurrent detected fault.
g
FUn-
Factory
setting
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
[5 min] (5): 5 minutes
[10 min] (10): 10 minutes
[30 min] (30): 30 minutes
[1 hour] (1h): 1 hour
[2 hours] (2h): 2 hours
[3 hours] (3h): 3 hours
[Unlimited] (Ct): Unlimited (except for [MOTOR PHASE LOSS] (OPF) and [INPUT PHASE LOSS] (PHF);
the max. duration of the restart process is limited to 3 hours)
M [Fault reset]
v [No] (nO): Not assigned
v [LI1] (LI1): Logic input LI1
v [LI2] (LI2): Logic input LI2
v [LI3] (LI3): Logic input LI3
v [LI4] (LI4): Logic input LI4
v [LI5] (LI5): Not applicable
v [LI6] (LI6): Not applicable
[No] (nO)
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
[FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-) menu
rEF-
Code
FLr
nO
YES
EtF
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
Cd11
Cd12
Cd13
Cd14
Cd15
LEt
Description
M [Catch on the fly]
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
HIG
v
nO
YES
rNP
FSt
[No] (nO)
I_O-
drC-
CtLFUnFLtCOMSUP-
[No] (nO)
[Active high]
(HIG)
[Active low] (LO): The external fault is detected when the logic input assigned to [External fault ass.] (EtF)
changes to state 0.
Note: In this case, [External fault ass.] (EtF) cannot be assigned to a control word bit from a communication
network.
[Active high] (HIG): The external fault is detected when the logic input or the bit assigned to [External fault
ass.] (EtF) changes to state 1.
Note: Where [External fault config] (LEt) = [Active high] (HIG), [External fault ass.] (EtF) is assigned to a
control word bit from a communication network, and where there is no [External fault ass.] (EtF) fault
detection, switching to [External fault config] (LEt) = [Active low] (LO) triggers [External fault ass.] (EtF) fault
detection. In this case, it is necessary to turn the drive off and then back on again.
M [External fault mgt]
v
v
v
v
SEt-
If [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 3] (L3), the following assignments are possible:
[CD11] (CD11): Bit 11 of the control word from a communication network
[CD12] (CD12): Bit 12 of the control word from a communication network
[CD13] (CD13): Bit 13 of the control word from a communication network
[CD14] (CD14): Bit 14 of the control word from a communication network
[CD15] (CD15): Bit 15 of the control word from a communication network
M [External fault config]
v
Factory
setting
Used to enable a smooth restart if the run command is maintained after the following events:
- Loss of line supply or simple power off
- Reset of current drive or automatic restart
- Freewheel stop
The speed given by the drive resumes from the estimated speed of the motor at the time of the restart, then
follows the ramp to the reference speed.
This function requires 2-wire control ([2/3 wire control] (tCC) = [2 wire] (2C)) with [2 wire type] (tCt) = [Level]
(LEL) or [Fwd priority] (PFO).
[No] (nO): Function inactive
[Yes] (YES): Function active
When the function is operational, it activates at each run command, resulting in a slight delay
(1 second max.).
[Catch on the fly] (FLr) is forced to [No] (nO) if brake control [Brake assignment] (bLC) is assigned, page 81.
M [External fault ass.]
v [No] (nO): Not assigned
v [LI1] (LI1): Logic input LI1
v [LI2] (LI2): Logic input LI2
v [LI3] (LI3): Logic input LI3
v [LI4] (LI4): Logic input LI4
v [LI5] (LI5): Not applicable
v [LI6] (LI6): Not applicable
LO
EPL
Adjustment
range
[Freewheel]
(YES)
[Ignore] (nO): Ignore
[Freewheel] (YES): Detected fault management with freewheel stop
[Ramp stop] (rMP): Detected fault management with stop on ramp
[Fast stop] (FSt): Detected fault management with fast stop
89
[FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-) menu
rEFSEt-
Code
Description
Adjustment
range
drC-
OPL
I_OCtL-
nO
YES
OAC
FUnFLt-
Factory setting
[Yes] (YES)
M [Output Phase Loss]
v [No] (nO): Function inactive
v [Yes] (YES): Tripping on the [MOTOR PHASE LOSS] (OPF)
v [Output cut] (OAC): No tripping on a [MOTOR PHASE LOSS] (OPF), but management of the output voltage
in order to avoid an overcurrent when the link with the motor is re-established and catch on the fly performed
even if [Catch on the fly] (FLr) = [No] (nO). To be used with output contactor.
[Output Phase Loss] (OPL) is forced to [Yes] (YES) if [Brake assignment] (bLC) is not set to [No] (nO),
page 81.
COMSUP-
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
If [Output Phase Loss] (OPL) is set to nO loss of cable is not detected.
• Check this action will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
IPL
nO
YES
OHL
nO
YES
rNP
FSt
M [Input phase loss]
v
v
[Yes] (YES)
This parameter is only accessible on 3-phase drives.
[No] (nO): Ignore
[Yes] (YES): Detected fault management with fast stop
M [Overtemp fault mgt]
v
v
v
v
[Freewheel]
(YES)
[Ignore] (nO): Ignore
[Freewheel] (YES): Detected fault management with freewheel stop
[Ramp stop] (rMP): Detected fault management with stop on ramp
[Fast stop] (FSt): Detected fault management with fast stop
CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO MOTOR
Inhibiting drive overheating fault detection results in the drive not being protected. This
invalidates the warranty.
• Check that the possible consequences do not present any risk.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
OLL
nO
YES
rNP
FSt
M [Overload fault mgt]
v
v
v
v
[Freewheel]
(YES)
[Ignore] (nO): Ignore
[Freewheel] (YES): Detected fault management with freewheel stop
[Ramp stop] (rMP): Detected fault management with stop on ramp
[Fast stop] (FSt): Detected fault management with fast stop
CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO MOTOR
If [Overload fault mgt] is set to nO, motor thermal protection is no longuer provided by the drive.
Provide an alternative means of thermal protection.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
90
[FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-) menu
rEF-
Code
SLL
Description
Adjustment
range
M [Modbus fault mgt]
SEt-
Factory setting
drC-
[Fast stop]
(FSt)
I_OCtL-
Not applicable
COL
FUn-
M [CANopen fault mgt]
[Fast stop] (FSt)
FLtCOM-
WARNING
SUP-
LOSS OF CONTROL
If [CANopen fault mgt] (COL) = [Ignore] (nO), communication control will be inhibited. For safety
reasons, inhibiting the communication fault detection should be restricted to the debug phase or
to special applications.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.
nO
YES
rNP
FSt
tnL
nO
YES
LFL
v
v
v
v
[Ignore] (nO): Ignore
[Freewheel] (YES): Detected fault management with freewheel stop
[Ramp stop] (rMP): Detected fault management with stop on ramp
[Fast stop] (FSt): Detected fault management with fast stop
M [Autotune fault mgt]
v
v
[Yes] (YES)
This parameter can be used to manage drive behavior in the event that auto-tuning is unsuccessful [AUTO
TUNING FAULT] (tnF)
[No] (nO): Ignored (the drive reverts to the factory settings)
[Yes] (YES): Detected fault management with drive locked
If [Cold stator resist.] (rSC), page 39, is not set to [No] (nO), [Autotune fault mgt] (tnL) is forced to [Yes]
(YES).
M [4-20mA loss]
nO
YES
LFF
rLS
v
v
v
v
rNP
FSt
v
v
[Freewheel]
(YES)
[Ignore] (nO): Ignored (only possible value if [AI3 min. value] (CrL3) y 3 mA, page 45)
[Freewheel] (YES): Detected fault management with freewheel stop
[fallback spd] (LFF): The drive switches to the fallback speed ([fallback spd] (LFF) parameter)
[Spd maint.] (rLS): The drive maintains the speed at which it was operating when the loss was detected.
This speed is saved and stored as a reference until the fault has disappeared.
[Ramp stop] (rMP): Detected fault management with stop on ramp
[Fast stop] (FSt): Detected fault management with fast stop
Note: Before setting [4-20mA loss] (LFL) to [fallback spd] (LFF) check the connection of input AI3.
If [4-20mA loss] (LFL) = [fallback spd] (LFF) or [Spd maint.] (rLS), no code is displayed.
LFF
M [Fallback speed]
0 to 500 Hz
10 Hz
Fallback speed setting in the event of a [4-20mA loss] (LFL).
91
[FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-) menu
rEFSEt-
Code
Description
Adjustment
range
drC-
M [Derated operation]
drn
I_OCtLFUn-
nO
YES
COM-
[No] (nO)
Lowers the tripping threshold of [Undervoltage] (USF): in order to operate on line supplies with 50%
voltage drops.
2s
FLt-
Factory
setting
v
v
[No] (nO): Function inactive
[Yes] (YES): Function active
In this case, drive performance is derated.
SUP-
CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO DRIVE
When [Derated operation] (drn) = [Yes] (YES), use a line choke (see catalogue).
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
M [UnderV. prevention]
StP
nO
NNS
v
v
rMP
FSt
v
v
[No] (nO)
This function can be used to control the type of stop where there is a loss of line supply.
[No] (nO): Locking of the drive and freewheel stopping of the motor
[DC Maintain] (MMS): This stop mode uses the inertia to maintain the drive power supply as long as
possible
[Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop according to the valid ramp ([Deceleration] (dEC) or [Deceleration 2] (dE2))
[Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop, the stopping time depends on the inertia and the braking ability of the drive
M [Fault inhibit assign.]
InH
[No] (nO)
DANGER
LOSS OF PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT PROTECTION
2s
• Enabling the fault inhibition parameter [Fault inhibit assign.] (InH) will disable the drive
controller protection features.
• InH should not be enabled for typical applications of this equipment.
• InH should be enabled only in extraordinary situations where a thorough risk analysis
demonstrates that the presence of adjustable speed drive protection poses a greater risk than
personnel injury or equipment damage.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
2s
92
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
This function disables drive protection for the following detected faults:
SLF, CnF, EPF, CrF, LFF, OHF, OBF, OLF, OSF, OPF, PHF, SOF, tnF, COF, bLF
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logic input LI1
[LI2] (LI2): Logic input LI2
[LI3] (LI3): Logic input LI3
[LI4] (LI4): Logic input LI4
[LI5] (LI5): Not applicable
[LI6] (LI6): Not applicable
The logic inputs are active in the high state.
The jog dial (ENT) needs to be pressed and held down (for 2 s) to change the assignment for this parameter.
[FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-) menu
Code
Description
rPr
nO
rtH
Adjustment
range
M [Operating t. reset]
v [No] (nO): No
v [rst. runtime] (rtH): Operating time reset to zero
Factory
setting
[No] (nO)
The [Operating t. reset] (rPr) parameter automatically returns to [No] (nO) after resetting to 0.
rp
nO
YES
M [Product reset]
v [No] (nO): No
v [Yes] (YES): Yes
[No] (nO)
DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
2s
You are going to reset the drive.
• Check this action will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
2s
The jog dial (ENT) needs to be pressed and held down (for 2 s) to change the assignment for this parameter.
93
[COMMUNICATION] (COM-) menu
rEFSEtdrCI_OCtLFUnFLtCOMSUP-
The parameters can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present. Modifications to the [Modbus Address]
(Add), [Modbus baud rate] (tbr), [Modbus format] (tFO), [CANopen address] (AdCO), and [CANopen bit rate] (bdCO) parameters are not
taken into account until the drive has been switched off and back on again.
Code
Description
Adjustment
range
M [Modbus Address]
Add
Factory
setting
1 to 247
1
Not applicable
M [Modbus baud rate]
tbr
19,200 bps
Not applicable
M [Modbus format]
tFO
[8-E-1] (8E1)
Not applicable
M [Modbus time out]
ttO
0.1 to 10 s
10 s
0 to 127
0
Not applicable
M [CANopen address]
AdCO
CANopen address for the drive.
M [CANopen bit rate]
bdCO
10.0
20.0
50.0
125.0
250.0
500.0
1000
ErCO
0
1
2
3
4
94
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
125 bps
Modbus transmission speed
[10 kbps] (10.0): 10 kbps
[20 kbps] (20.0): 20 kbps
[50 kbps] (50.0): 50 kbps
[125 kbps] (125.0): 125 kbps
[250 kbps] (250.0): 250 kbps
[500 kbps] (500.0): 500 kbps
[1 Mbps] (1000): 1000 kbps
M [Error code]
v No error
v Bus off
v Life time
v CAN overrun
v Heartbeat
-
[COMMUNICATION] (COM-) menu
rEF-
Code
Description
FLO
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
Adjustment
range
M [Forced local assign.]
v [No] (nO): Not assigned
v [LI1] (LI1): Logic input LI1
v [LI2] (LI2): Logic input LI2
v [LI3] (LI3): Logic input LI3
v [LI4] (LI4): Logic input LI4
v [LI5] (LI5): Not applicable
v [LI6] (LI6): Not applicable
Factory
setting
SEt-
[No] (nO)
I_O-
drC-
CtLFUnFLtCOMSUP-
In forced local mode, the terminals and the display terminal regain control of the drive.
M [Forced local Ref.]
FLOC
g
AI1
AI2
AI3
AIU1
LCC
v
v
v
v
v
[AI1] (AI1) (1)
Parameter can only be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) = [Level 3] (L3), page 55.
In forced local mode, only the speed reference is taken into account. PI functions, summing inputs, etc. are
not active.
See the diagrams on pages 52 to 54.
[AI1] (AI1): Not applicable
[AI2] (AI2): Analog input AI2, logic inputs LI
[AI3] (AI3): Analog input AI3, logic inputs LI
[AI Virtual 1] (AIV1): Jog dial, RUN/STOP buttons
[HMI] (LCC): Remote display terminal: [HMI Frequency ref.] (LFr) reference, page 29, RUN/STOP/FWD/
REV buttons
(1) When using X2X, the factory setting is changed automatically to [AI Virtual 1] (AIV1).
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
95
[MONITORING] (SUP-) menu
rEFSEtdrCI_OCtLFUnFLtCOM-
Submenu
SUP-
The parameters can be accessed with the drive running or stopped.
Some functions have numerous parameters. In order to clarify programming and avoid having to scroll through endless parameters, these
functions have been grouped in submenus.
Like menus, submenus are identified by a dash after their code: LIA- for example.
When the drive is running, the value displayed is that of one of the monitoring parameters. By default, the value displayed is the output
frequency applied to the motor ([Output frequency] (rFr) parameter).
While the value of the new monitoring parameter required is being displayed, press and hold down the jog dial (ENT) again (for 2 seconds)
to confirm the change of monitoring parameter and store it. From then on, it is the value of this parameter that will be displayed during
operation (even after powering down).
Unless the new choice is confirmed by pressing and holding down ENT again, the display will revert to the previous parameter after
powering down.
Note: After the drive has been turned off or following a loss of line supply, the parameter displayed is the drive status ([Ready] (rdY), for
example).
The selected parameter is displayed following a run command.
96
[MONITORING] (SUP-) menu
rEF-
Code
Variation range
Description
M [HMI Frequency ref.]
LFr
g
SEt-
0 to 500 Hz
drCI_O-
Frequency reference for control via built-in display terminal or remote display terminal.
CtL-
M [Internal PID ref.]
rPI
0 to 100%
FUnFLt-
Internal PID reference
Parameter is only visible if [PID feedback ass.] (PIF) is not set to [No] (nO), page 77.
g
M [Frequency ref.]
FrH
COM-
0 to 500 Hz
SUP-
Frequency reference before ramp (absolute value).
M [Output frequency]
rFr
- 500 Hz to + 500 Hz
This parameter is also used for the +/- speed function using the jog dial on the keypad or display terminal.
It displays and validates operation (see page 55). In the event of a loss of line supply, [Output frequency]
(rFr) is not stored and the +/- speed function must be re-enabled in [MONITORING] (SUP-) and [Output
frequency] (rFr).
SPd1
or
SPd2
or
SPd3
LCr
M [Cust. output value]
[Cust. output value] (SPd1), [Cust. output value] (SPd2) or [Cust. output value] (SPd3) depending on the
[Scale factor display] (SdS) parameter, page 37 ([Cust. output value] (SPd3) in the factory setting)
M [Motor current]
Estimation of current in the motor
Opr
M [Motor power]
100% = nominal motor power, calculated using the parameters entered in the [MOTOR CONTROL]
(drC-) menu
ULn
M [Mains voltage]
This parameter gives the line voltage via the DC bus, both in motor mode or when the motor is stopped.
tHr
M [Motor thermal state]
100% = nominal thermal state
118% = " OLF " threshold (drive overload)
tHd
M [Drv. Therm att.]
100% = nominal thermal state
118% = " OHF " threshold (drive overheating)
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and set from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in
these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
97
[MONITORING] (SUP-) menu
rEFSEt-
Code
drC-
LFt
I_O-
bLF
CFF
CFI
CnF
COF
CrF
EEF
EPF
IF1
IF2
IF3
IF4
LFF
nOF
ObF
OCF
OHF
OLF
OPF
OSF
PHF
SCF
SOF
tnF
USF
CtLFUnFLtCOMSUP-
Otr
Description
Variation range
M [Last fault occurred]
v [Brake control] (bLF): Brake control detected fault
v [Incorrect config.] (CFF): Incorrect configuration (parameters)
v [Invalid config.] (CFI): Invalid configuration (parameters)
v [NETWORK FAULT] (CnF): Communication detected fault on the communication card
v [CANopen com.] (COF): Communication detected fault line 2 (CANopen)
v [Capa.charg] (CrF): Capacitor precharge detected fault
v [EEPROM] (EEF): EEPROM memory detected fault
v [External] (EPF): External fault
v [INTERNAL FAULT] (IF1): Unknown rating
v [INTERNAL FAULT] (IF2): HMI card not recognized or incompatible/display absent
v [INTERNAL FAULT] (IF3): EEPROM detected fault
v [INTERNAL FAULT] (IF4): Industrial EEPROM detected fault
v [4-20mA] (LFF): 4-20 mA loss
v [No fault] (nOF): No fault code saved
v [Overbraking] (ObF): DC bus overvoltage
v [Overcurrent] (OCF): Overcurrent
v [Drive overheat] (OHF): Drive overheating
v [Motor overload] (OLF): Motor overload
v [Mot. phase] (OPF): Motor phase loss
v [Mains overvoltage] (OSF): Line supply overvoltage
v [Mains phase loss] (PHF): Line phase loss
v [Mot. short circuit] (SCF): Motor short-circuit (phase, ground)
v [Overspeed] (SOF): Motor overspeed
v [Auto-tuning] (tnF): Auto-tuning detected fault
v [Undervoltage] (USF): Line supply undervoltage
M [Motor torque]
100% = nominal motor torque, calculated using the parameters entered in the [MOTOR CONTROL]
(drC-) menu.
rtH
M [Run time]
0 to 65,530 hours
Total time the motor has been powered up: 0 to 9,999 (hours), then 10.00 to 65.53 (kilo-hours).
Can be reset to zero by the [Operating t. reset] (rPr) parameter in the [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-)
menu, page 93.
98
[MONITORING] (SUP-) menu
rEF-
Code
Description
M [PIN code 1]
COd
SEt-
Variation range
drC-
(1)
I_O-
Enables the drive configuration to be protected using an access code.
When access is locked by means of a code, only the parameters in the [MONITORING]
(SUP-) and [SPEED REFERENCE] (rEF-) menus can be accessed. The MODE button can be used to
switch between menus.
CtLFUnFLt-
0FF
v
On
v
8888
v
tUS
tAb
PEnd
PrOG
FAIL
dOnE
Strd
Note: Before entering a code, do not forget to make a careful note of it.
[OFF] (OFF): No access locking codes
• To lock access, enter a code (2 to 9,999). The display can be incremented using the jog dial. Then
press ENT. [ON] (On) appears on the screen to indicate that access has been locked.
[ON] (On): A code is locking access (2 to 9,999).
• To unlock access, enter the code (incrementing the display using the jog dial) and press ENT. The
code remains on the display and access is unlocked until the next time the drive is turned off. Access
will be locked again the next time the drive is turned on.
• If an incorrect code is entered, the display changes to [ON] (On), and access remains locked.
Access is unlocked (the code remains on the screen).
• To reactivate locking with the same code when access has been unlocked, return to [ON] (On)
using the jog dial and then press ENT. [ON] (On) remains on the screen to indicate that access has
been locked.
• To lock access with a new code when access has been unlocked, enter the new code (increment
the display using the jog dial) and then press ENT. [ON] (On) appears on the screen to indicate that
access has been locked.
• To clear locking when access has been unlocked, return to [OFF] (OFF) using the jog dial and then
press ENT. [OFF] (OFF) remains on the display. Access is unlocked and will remain so until the next
restart.
COMSUP-
M [Auto tuning state]
v [Not done] (tAb): The default stator resistance value is used to control the motor
v [Pending] (PEnd): Auto-tuning has been requested but not yet performed
v [In Progress] (PrOG): Auto-tuning in progress
v [Failed] (FAIL): Auto-tuning was unsuccessful
v [Done] (dOnE): The stator resistance measured by the auto-tuning function is used to control the motor
v [Entered R1] (Strd): The cold state stator resistance ([Cold stator resist.] (rSC) which is not set to [No]
(nO)) is used to control the motor
UdP
M [Drv.Soft.Ver]
This parameter gives the software version for the drive.
Example: 1102 = V1.1 IE02
(1) When using X2X, the factory setting is changed automatically to 64.
99
[MONITORING] (SUP-) menu
rEF-
Code
SEtdrCI_O-
LIA-
CtL-
Name/Description
b
FLtCOMSUP-
Factory
setting
[LOGIC INPUT CONF.]
Can be used to display the functions assigned to each input. If no functions have been assigned, [No] (nO)
is displayed. The jog dial can be used to scroll through all the functions. If a number of functions have been
assigned to the same input, check that they are compatible.
LI1A
LI2A
LI3A
LI4A
LI5A
LI6A
FUn-
Adjustment
range
Can be used to display the state of logic inputs (display segment assignment: high = 1, low = 0)
LIS
State 1
State 0
LI1
LI2 LI3
LI4 LI5
LI6
Example above: LI1 and LI6 are at 1; LI2 to LI5 are at 0.
AIAAI1A
AI2A
AI3A
100
b
[ANALOG INPUTS IMAGE]
Can be used to display the functions assigned to each input. If no functions have been assigned, [No] (nO)
is displayed. The jog dial can be used to scroll through all the functions. If a number of functions have been
assigned to the same input, check that they are compatible.
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
Drive does not start, no code displayed
• If the display does not light up, check the power supply to the drive and check the wiring of inputs and the communication interface.
• The assignment of the " Fast stop " or " Freewheel stop " functions will prevent the drive from starting if the corresponding logic inputs
are not powered up. The ACOPOSinverter X64 then displays [Freewheel stop] (nSt) or [Fast stop] (FSt). This is normal since these
functions are active at zero so that the drive will be stopped if there is a wire break.
• Check that the run command input(s) have been actuated in accordance with the chosen control mode (the [2/3 wire control] (tCC)
parameter in the [INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I_O-) menu, page 44).
• If an input is assigned to the limit switch function and this input is at zero, the drive can only be started up by sending a command for
the opposite direction (see page 85).
• If the reference channel (page 50) or the control channel (page 51) is assigned to a communication network, when the power supply
is connected, the drive will display [Freewheel stop] (nSt) and remain in stop mode until the communication bus sends a command.
• If the LED on the DC bus is lit and nothing appears on the display, check that there is no short-circuit on the 10 V power supply.
• If the drive displays [Ready] (rdy) and refuses to start, check that there is no short-circuit on the 10 V power supply and check the
wiring of inputs and the communication interface.
• In the factory setting, the " RUN " button is inactive. Set the [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) parameter, page 26 , and the [Cmd channel 1] (Cd1)
parameter, page 56, to control the drive locally.
Fault detection codes which require a power reset after the fault is cleared
The cause of the fault must be removed before resetting by cycling power to the drive.
[PRECHARGE FAULT] (CrF), [OVERSPEED] (SOF), [AUTO-TUNING FAULT] (tnF), and [BRAKE CONTROL FAULT] (bLF) can also be
reset remotely using a logic input (the [Fault reset] (rSF) parameter in the [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-) menu, page 88).
The faults bLF, CrF, EEF, IF1, IF2, IF3, IF4, OCF, SOF and tnF can also be locked or resetted by logic input or network control bit
(Parameter [Fault inhibit assign.] (InH), page 92).
Code
Name
Probable cause
Remedy
bLF
[BRAKE CONTROL
FAULT]
• Brake release current not reached
• Brake engage frequency threshold
[Brake engage freq] (bEn) = [No]
(nO) (not set) whereas the brake
control [Brake assignment] (bLC) is
assigned
• Check the drive/motor connection
• Check the motor windings
• Check the [Brake release I FW] (Ibr) setting in the
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu, page 81
• Apply the recommended settings for [Brake engage
freq] (bEn), pages 80 and 81
CrF
[PRECHARGE
FAULT]
• Precharge relay control or damaged
precharge resistor
• Replace the drive
EEF
[EEPROM FAULT]
• Internal memory
• Check the environment (electromagnetic
compatibility)
• Replace the drive
IF1
[INTERNAL
FAULT]
• Unknown rating
IF2
[INTERNAL
FAULT]
• HMI card not recognized
• HMI card incompatible
• No display present
• Replace the drive
• Restart the drive
• Contact your local B & R office
IF3
[INTERNAL
FAULT]
• EEPROM
IF4
[INTERNAL
FAULT]
• Industrial EEPROM
101
Diagnostics and troubleshooting (continued)
Fault detection codes which require a power reset after the fault is cleared
(continued)
Code
Name
Probable cause
Remedy
OCF
[OVERCURRENT]
• Parameters in the [SETTINGS]
(SEt-) and [MOTOR CONTROL]
(drC-) menus are incorrect
• Inertia or load too high
• Mechanical locking
• Check the parameters in [SETTINGS] (SEt-), page
29, and [MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) page 38
• Check the size of the motor/drive/load
• Check the state of the mechanism
SCF
[MOTOR SHORT
CIRCUIT]
• Short-circuit or grounding at the
drive output
• Significant ground leakage current at
the drive output if several motors are
connected in parallel
• Check the cables connecting the drive to the motor,
and the motor insulation
• Reduce the switching frequency
• Connect chokes in series with the motor
SOF
[OVERSPEED]
• Instability or
• Driving load too high
• Check the motor, gain and stability parameters
• Add a braking resistor
• Check the size of the motor/drive/load
tnF
[AUTO TUNING
FAULT]
• Special motor or motor whose power
is not suitable for the drive
• Motor not connected to the drive
• Use the L ratio or the [Var. torque] (P) ratio (see [U/F
mot 1 selected] (UFt), page 41)
• Check that the motor is present during auto-tuning
• If an output contactor is being used, close it during
auto-tuning
Fault detection codes that can be reset with the automatic restart function after the
cause has disappeared
See the [Automatic restart] (Atr) function, page 87.
These detected faults can also be reset by turning the drive off then on again or by means of a logic input (the [Fault reset] (rSF) parameter,
page 88, in the [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-) menu, page 86).
Code
Name
Probable cause
Remedy
CnF
[NETWORK FAULT]
• Communication detected fault on the
communication card
• Check the environment (electromagnetic
compatibility)
• Check the wiring
• Check the time out
• Replace the option card
COF
[CANopen FAULT]
• Interruption in communication on the
CANopen bus
• Check the communication bus
• Refer to the relevant product documentation
EPF
[EXTERNAL FAULT]
• Depending on user
• Depending on user
LFF
[4-20mA LOSS]
• Loss of the 4-20 mA reference on
input AI3
• Check the connection on input AI3
ObF
[OVERBRAKING]
• Braking too sudden
or driving load
• Increase the deceleration time
• Install a braking resistor if necessary
• Activate the [Dec ramp adapt.] (bra) function,
page 61, if it is compatible with the application
OHF
[DRIVE OVERHEAT]
• Drive temperature too high
• Check the motor load, the drive ventilation and the
environment. Wait for the drive to cool before
restarting
102
Diagnostics and troubleshooting (continued)
Fault detection codes that can be reset with the automatic restart function after the
cause has disappeared (continued)
Code
OLF
Name
[MOTOR OVERLOAD]
Probable cause
• Triggered by excessive motor
current
• [Cold stator resist.] (rSC) parameter
value incorrect
Remedy
• Check the [Mot. therm. current] (ItH) setting, page
30, of the motor thermal protection, check the
motor load. Wait for the drive to cool before
restarting
• Remeasure [Cold stator resist.] (rSC), page 39
OPF
[MOTOR PHASE
LOSS]
• Loss of one phase at drive output
• Output contactor open
• Motor not connected or motor power
too low
• Instantaneous instability in the motor
current
• Check the connections from the drive to the motor
• If an output contactor is being used, set [Output
Phase Loss] (OPL) to [Output cut] (OAC) ([FAULT
MANAGEMENT] (FLt-) menu, page 90)
• Test on a low-power motor or without a motor: In
factory settings mode, motor output phase loss
detection is active ([Output Phase Loss] (OPL) =
[Yes] (YES)). To check the drive in a test or
maintenance environment without having to
switch to a motor with the same rating as the drive
(particularly useful in the case of high-power
drives), deactivate motor phase loss detection
([Output Phase Loss] (OPL) = [No] (nO)).
• Check and optimize the [IR compensation] (UFr),
[Rated motor volt.] (UnS), and [Rated mot. current]
(nCr) parameters, and perform an [Auto tuning]
(tUn) operation, page 40
OSF
[MAINS
OVERVOLTAGE]
• Line voltage is too high
• Disturbed line supply
• Check the line voltage
PHF
[INPUT PHASE LOSS]
• Drive incorrectly supplied or a fuse
blown
• Failure of one phase
• Three-phase ACOPOSinverter X64
used on a single-phase line supply
• Unbalanced load
• This protection only operates with
the drive on load
•
•
•
•
SLF
[MODBUS FAULT]
• Interruption in communication on the
Modbus bus
• Remote display terminal enabled
([HMI command] (LCC) = [Yes]
(YES), page 58) and terminal
disconnected.
• Check the communication bus
• Refer to the relevant product documentation.
• Check the link with the remote display terminal.
Check the power connection and the fuses
Reset
Use a three-phase line supply
Disable the detection by setting [Input phase loss]
(IPL) = [No] (nO) ([FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-)
menu, page 90)
103
Diagnostics and troubleshooting (continued)
Fault detection codes that are reset as soon as their cause disappears
Code
Name
Probable cause
Remedy
CFF
[INCORRECT
CONFIG.]
• The current configuration is
inconsistent
• Addition or removal of an option
• Return to factory settings or retrieve the backup
configuration, if it is valid. See the [Restore config.]
(FCS) parameter, page 43
CFI
[INVALID CONFIG]
• Invalid configuration
The configuration loaded in the
drive via the serial link is
inconsistent
• Check the configuration loaded previously.
• Load a consistent configuration.
USF
[UNDERVOLTAGE]
• Insufficient line supply
• Transient voltage dip
• Check the voltage and the voltage parameter.
Tripping threshold in [UNDERVOLTAGE] (USF)
8I64S2*****.00X-1: 160 V
8I64T2*****.00X-1: 160 V
8I64T4*****.00X-1: 300 V
• Replace the drive
• Damaged precharge resistor
104
Index of functions
[+/- SPEED]
73
[2/3 wire control]
44
[ACCESS LEVEL]
55
[Logic output]
45
[Auto DC injection]
65
[Automatic restart]
87
[Auto tuning]
40
Brake control
80
[CANopen address]
94
[Catch on the fly]
89
[Cmd switching]
57
Control and reference channels
47
[Current limit 2]
82
[Current Limitation]
35
[DC injection assign.]
63
[Dec ramp adapt.]
61
Drive thermal protection
11
Drive ventilation
11
[Fast stop]
62
[Fault reset]
88
[Forced local assign.]
95
[Freewheel stop ass.]
64
[JOG]
72
Management of limit switches
85
[Modbus Address]
94
[Mot. therm. current]
30
Motor thermal protection
12
PI regulator
75
Preset speeds
68
[R1 Assignment]
46
[R2 Assignment]
46
[RAMPS]
59
[Ramp switch ass.]
61
[Ref. 2 switching]
56
Return to factory settings/Restore configuration
43
Saving the configuration
42
[Skip Frequency]
33
[STOP MODES]
62
[SUMMING INPUTS]
67
[Switching freq.]
37
[SWITCHING MOTOR]
83
[U/F mot 1 selected]
41
105
Index of parameter codes and customer settings
Name
Unit
Page
AC2
29
61
[Acceleration 2]
s
In accordance
with Inr
-
5
ACC
29
60
[Acceleration]
s
In accordance
with Inr
-
3
AdC
65
[Auto DC injection]
-
nO
YES
Ct
[No]: No injection
[Yes]: Standstill injection for adjustable period
[Continuous]: Continuous standstill injection
AdCO
94
[CANopen address]
-
0 to 127
-
0
Add
94
[Modbus Address]
-
Not applicable
1
AI1A
100
[AI1 assignment]
-
-
Not applicable
-
AI2A
100
[AI2 assignment]
-
-
-
-
AI3A
100
[AI3 assignment]
-
-
-
-
AIU1
28
[Image input AIV1]
%
0 to 100
-
-
AO1t
45
[AO1 Type]
-
0A
4A
10U
[Current]: 0 - 20 mA configuration
[Cur. 4-20]: Not applicable
[Voltage]: Not applicable
0
Atr
87
[Automatic restart]
-
nO
YES
[No]: Function inactive
[Yes]: Automatic restart
10.0
20.0
50.0
125.0
250.0
500.0
1000
[10 kbps]: 10 kbps
[20 kbps]: 20 kbps
[50 kbps]: 50 kbps
[125 kbps]: 125 kbps
[250 kbps]: 250 kbps
[500 kbps]: 500 kbps
[1 Mbps]: 1000 kbps
kbps
Value/Possible function
Factory
setting
Code
YES
nO
bdCO
94
[CANopen bit rate]
bEn
81
[Brake engage freq]
-
nO
0 to LSP
Not set
Adjustment range in Hz
bEt
81
[Brake engage time]
s
0 to 5
-
bFr
26
38
[Standard mot. freq]
Hz
50
60
[50Hz IEC]
[60Hz NEMA]
50
nO
[No]: Motor torque during brake release in the direction
of rotation requested
[Yes]: Motor torque during brake release in forward
rotation
nO
125.0
nO
0.5
bIP
81
[Brake impulse]
-
bLC
81
[Brake assignment]
-
nO
r2
dO
[No]: Not assigned
[R2]: Relay R2
[DO]: Logic output dO
nO
brA
61
[Dec ramp adapt.]
-
nO
YES
[No]: Function inactive
[Yes]: Function active
YES
brL
81
[Brake release freq]
Hz
0.0 to 10.0
-
In accordance
with the drive
rating
brt
81
[Brake Release time]
s
0 to 5
-
0.5
106
YES
Customer
setting
Index of parameter codes and customer settings
CCS
Cd1
Page
57
56
Name
[Cmd switching]
[Cmd channel 1]
Value/Possible function
Factory
setting
-
Cd1
Cd2
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
C111
C112
C113
C114
C115
C211
C212
C213
C214
C215
[ch1 active] : Control channel = channel 1
[ch2 active] : Control channel = channel 2
[LI1]: Logic input LI1
[LI2]: Logic input LI2
[LI3]: Logic input LI3
[LI4]: Logic input LI4
[LI5]: Not applicable
[LI6]: Not applicable
[C111]: Not applicable
[C112]: Not applicable
[C113]: Not applicable
[C114]: Not applicable
[C115]: Not applicable
[C211]: Bit 11 of network control word
[C212]: Bit 12 of network control word
[C213]: Bit 13 of network control word
[C214]: Bit 14 of network control word
[C215]: Bit 15 of network control word
Cd1
-
tEr
LOC
LCC
Ndb
nEt
[Terminal]: Control via terminals
[Local]: Control via keypad
[Remot. HMI]: Control via remote display terminal
[Modbus]: Not applicable
[Com. card]: Control via the network
tEr
tEr
LOC
LCC
Ndb
nEt
[Terminal]: Control via terminals
[Local]: Control via keypad
[Remot. HMI]: Control via remote display terminal
[Modbus]: Not applicable
[Com. card]: Control via the network
Mdb
StS
Std
[Start/Stop]: Start/stop configuration
[Factory set.]: Factory configuration
Std
SIN
SEP
[Not separ.]: Combined
[Separate]: Separate
SIM
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
Cd11
Code
[No]: Not assigned
[LI1]: Logic input LI1
[LI2]: Logic input LI2
[LI3]: Logic input LI3
[LI4]: Logic input LI4
[LI5]: Not applicable
[LI6]: Not applicable
[CD11]: Bit 11 of the control word from a communication
network
[CD12]: Bit 12 of the control word from a communication
network
[CD13]: Bit 13 of the control word from a communication
network
[CD14]: Bit 14 of the control word from a communication
network
[CD15]: Bit 15 of the control word from a communication
network
Unit
Cd2
56
[Cmd channel 2]
-
CFG
42
46
58
[Macro configuration]
-
CHCF
56
[Profile]
-
CHP
83
[Motor switching]
Cd12
Cd13
Cd14
Cd15
Customer
setting
nO
CLI
35
[Current Limitation]
In
0.25 to 1.5
-
1.5
CL2
35
82
[I Limit. 2 value]
In
0.25 to 1.5
-
1.5
CnF
98
[NETWORK FAULT]
-
-
-
-
COd
99
[PIN code 1]
-
0FF
On
8888
[OFF]: No code is locking access
[ON]: A code is locking access
Access is unlocked
-
107
Index of parameter codes and customer settings
Code
Page
Name
Unit
Value/Possible function
nO
YES
COL
91
[CANopen fault mgt]
-
rNP
FSt
[Ignore]: Ignore
[Freewheel]: Detected fault management with
freewheel stop
[Ramp stop]: Detected fault management with stop
on ramp
[Fast stop]: Detected fault management with fast
stop
[No]: No copy
[Reference]: Copy reference
[Command]: Copy command
[Cmd + ref.] : Copy command and reference
Factory
setting
YES
COp
57
[Copy channel 1 & lt; & gt; 2]
-
nO
SP
Cd
ALL
COS
39
[Motor 1 Cosinus Phi]
-
0.5 to 1
-
In accordance
with the drive
rating
COS2
84
[Motor 2 Cosinus Phi]
-
0.5 to 1
-
In accordance
with the drive
rating
CrH3
45
[AI3 max. value]
mA
4 to 20
-
20
CrL3
45
[AI3 min. value]
mA
0 to 20
-
4
Ctd
36
[Current threshold]
In
0 to 1.5
-
1
dCF
62
[Differential current fault]
-
0 to 10
-
4
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
Cd11
[No]: Not assigned
[LI1]: Logic input LI1
[LI2]: Logic input LI2
[LI3]: Logic input LI3
[LI4]: Logic input LI4
[LI5]: Not applicable
[LI6]: Not applicable
[CD11]: Bit 11 of the control word from a
communication network
[CD12]: Bit 12 of the control word from a
communication network
[CD13]: Bit 13 of the control word from a
communication network
[CD14]: Bit 14 of the control word from a
communication network
[CD15]: Bit 15 of the control word from a
communication network
dCI
63
[DC injection assign.]
Cd12
Cd13
Cd14
Cd15
nO
nO
dE2
29
61
[Deceleration 2]
s
In
accordance
with Inr
-
5
dEC
29
60
[Deceleration]
s
In
accordance
with Inr
-
3
[No]: Not assigned
[I motor]: Not applicable
[Motor freq.]: Not applicable
[Motor torq.]: Not applicable
[P. supplied]: Not applicable
[Drive fault]: Detected fault.
[Drv running]: Drive running
[Freq. limit]: Frequency threshold reached
[HSP limit]: High speed reached
[Brake seq.]: Current threshold reached
[Freq. ref.]: Frequency reference reached
[Drv thermal]: Motor thermal threshold reached
[Brake seq.]: Brake sequence
[No 4-20mA]: Not applicable
nO
[No]: Function inactive
[Yes]: Function active
nO
dO
45
[Logic output]
-
nO
OCr
OFr
Otr
OPr
FLt
rUn
FtA
FLA
CtA
SrA
tSA
bLC
APL
drn
92
[Derated operation]
-
nO
YES
108
Customer
setting
Index of parameter codes and customer settings
Code
Page
Name
Unit
Value/Possible function
FSt
EPL
ErCO
EtF
74
89
94
89
[External fault mgt]
[Error code]
[External fault ass.]
-
-
-
[Ignore]: Ignore
[Freewheel]: Detected fault management with
freewheel stop
[Ramp stop]: Detected fault management with stop on
ramp
[Fast stop]: Detected fault management with fast stop
0
1
2
3
4
No error
Bus off
Life time
CAN overrun
Heartbeat
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
Cd11
[-Speed assignment]
[No]: Not assigned
[LI1]: Logic input LI1
[LI2]: Logic input LI2
[LI3]: Logic input LI3
[LI4]: Logic input LI4
[LI5]: Not applicable
[LI6]: Not applicable
nO
YES
dSP
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
[No]: Not assigned
[LI1]: Logic input LI1
[LI2]: Logic input LI2
[LI3]: Logic input LI3
[LI4]: Logic input LI4
[LI5]: Not applicable
[LI6]: Not applicable
[CD11]: Bit 11 of the control word from a
communication network
[CD12]: Bit 12 of the control word from a
communication network
[CD13]: Bit 13 of the control word from a
communication network
[CD14]: Bit 14 of the control word from a
communication network
[CD15]: Bit 15 of the control word from a
communication network
rNP
Cd12
Cd13
Cd14
Cd15
FbS
33
77
FCS
43
46
58
[Restore config.]
FLG
30
[FreqLoopGain]
%
FLG2
36
84
[FreqLoopGain 2]
FLO
95
[PID fbk scale factor]
-
0.1 to
100
Customer
setting
nO
YES
-
nO
1
[NO]: Function inactive
[Internal]: The current configuration becomes identical
to the backup configuration previously saved by SCS
= StrI.
[Factory Set.]: Current configuration replaced by the
configuration selected by the CFG parameter
nO
1 to 100
-
20
%
1 to 100
-
20
-
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
[No]: Not assigned
[LI1]: Logic input LI1
[LI2]: Logic input LI2
[LI3]: Logic input LI3
[LI4]: Logic input LI4
[LI5]: Not applicable
[LI6]: Not applicable
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
AIUI
LCC
[AI1]: Not applicable
[AI2]: Analog input AI2, logic inputs LI
[AI3]: Analog input AI3, logic inputs LI
[AI Virtual 1]: Jog dial, RUN/STOP buttons
[HMI]: Remote display terminal, RUN/STOP/FWD/
REV buttons
nO
YES
[No]: Function inactive
[Yes]: Function active
nO
rECI
InI
[Forced local assign.]
-
Factory
setting
FLOC
95
[Forced local Ref.]
-
FLr
89
[Catch on the fly]
-
AI1
nO
109
Index of parameter codes and customer settings
Code
Page
Name
Unit
Value/Possible function
Factory
setting
26
55
[Ref.1 channel]
-
AI1
[No]: Not assigned
[AI1]: Not applicable
[AI2]: Analog input AI2
[AI3]: Analog input AI3
[AI Virtual 1]: Jog dial
[+/-Speed]: +/- speed reference via LI
[+/-spd HMI]: +/- speed reference using the jog dial on
the ACOPOSinverter X64 keypad
[HMI]: Reference via the remote display terminal
[Modbus]: Not applicable
[Com. card]: Reference via network
nO
LCC
Ndb
nEt
Fr1
[AI1]: Not applicable
[AI2]: Analog input AI2
[AI3]: Analog input AI3
[AI Virtual 1]: Jog dial
[+/-Speed]: +/- speed reference via LI
[+/-spd HMI]: +/- speed reference using the jog dial on
the ACOPOSinverter X64 keypad
[HMI]: Reference via the remote display terminal
[Modbus]: Not applicable
[Com. card]: Reference via network
AI1
AI2
AI3
AIU1
UPdt
UpdH
LCC
Ndb
nEt
Fr2
55
[Ref.2 channel]
-
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
AIU1
UPdt
UpdH
FrH
97
[Frequency ref.]
Hz
0 to 500
-
-
FrS
38
[Rated motor freq.]
Hz
10 to 500
-
50
FrS2
83
[Nom. motor 2 freq.]
Hz
10 to 500
-
50
Frt
61
[Ramp 2 threshold]
Hz
0 to 500
-
0
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
Cd11
[No]: Not assigned
[LI1]: Logic input LI1
[LI2]: Logic input LI2
[LI3]: Logic input LI3
[LI4]: Logic input LI4
[LI5]: Not applicable
[LI6]: Not applicable
[CD11]: Bit 11 of the control word from a communication
network
[CD12]: Bit 12 of the control word from a communication
network
[CD13]: Bit 13 of the control word from a communication
network
[CD14]: Bit 14 of the control word from a communication
network
[CD15]: Bit 15 of the control word from a communication
network
FSt
62
[Fast stop]
Cd12
Cd13
Cd14
Cd15
nO
Ftd
36
[Freq. threshold]
Hz
0 to 500
-
bFr
HSP
30
[High speed]
Hz
LSP to tFr
-
bFr
Ibr
81
[Brake release I FW]
In
0 to 1.36
-
In accordance
with the drive
rating
IdC
31
63
[DC inject. level 1]
In
0 to In
-
0.7
-
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
[No]: Not assigned
[LI1]: Logic input LI1
[LI2]: Logic input LI2
[LI3]: Logic input LI3
[LI4]: Logic input LI4
[LI5]: Not applicable
[LI6]: Not applicable
InH
110
92
[Fault inhibit assign.]
nO
Customer
setting
Index of parameter codes and customer settings
Name
Page
Inr
60
[Ramp increment]
-
0.01
0.1
1
[0.01]: Ramp can be set between 0.05 s and 327.6 s
[0.1]: Ramp can be set between 0.1 s and 3,276 s
[1]: Ramp can be set between 1 s and 32,760 s
IPL
90
[Input phase loss]
-
nO
YES
[No]: Ignore
[Yes]: Detected fault management with fast stop
YES
ItH
30
[Mot. therm. current]
In
0.2 to 1.5
-
In accordance
with the
drive rating
JF2
33
[Skip Frequency 2]
Hz
1 to 500
-
0
JGF
33
72
[Jog frequency]
Hz
0 to 10
-
10
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
[No]: Not assigned
[LI1]: Logic input LI1
[LI2]: Logic input LI2
[LI3]: Logic input LI3
[LI4]: Logic input LI4
[LI5]: Not applicable
[LI6]: Not applicable
nO
0 to 500
-
L1
L2
[Level 1]: Access to standard functions
[Level 2]: Access to advanced functions in the FUnmenu
[Level 3]: Access to advanced functions and management of
mixed control modes
L1
-
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
[No]: Not assigned
[LI1]: Logic input LI1
[LI2]: Logic input LI2
[LI3]: Logic input LI3
[LI4]: Logic input LI4
[LI5]: Not applicable
[LI6]: Not applicable
nO
[No]: Not assigned
[LI1]: Logic input LI1
[LI2]: Logic input LI2
[LI3]: Logic input LI3
[LI4]: Logic input LI4
[LI5]: Not applicable
[LI6]: Not applicable
nO
72
[JOG]
JPF
33
[Skip Frequency]
LAC
55
[ACCESS LEVEL]
-
Hz
Value/Possible function
Customer
setting
0.1
JOG
Unit
Factory
setting
Code
L3
LAF
85
[Stop FW limit sw.]
0
LAr
85
[Stop RV limit sw.]
-
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
LAS
85
[Stop type]
-
rMP
FSt
nSt
[Ramp stop]: On ramp
[Fast stop]: Fast stop
[Freewheel]: Freewheel stop
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
Cd11
[No]: Not assigned
[LI1]: Logic input LI1
[LI2]: Logic input LI2
[LI3]: Logic input LI3
[LI4]: Logic input LI4
[LI5]: Not applicable
[LI6]: Not applicable
[CD11]: Bit 11 of the control word from a communication
network
[CD12]: Bit 12 of the control word from a communication
network
[CD13]: Bit 13 of the control word from a communication
network
[CD14]: Bit 14 of the control word from a communication
network
[CD15]: Bit 15 of the control word from a communication
network
nO
nO
LC2
82
[Current limit 2]
Cd12
Cd13
Cd14
Cd15
LCC
58
[HMI command]
-
nO
YES
[No]: Function inactive
[Yes]: Enables control of the drive using the STOP/RESET,
RUN and FWD/REV buttons on the display terminal
LCr
97
[Motor current]
A
-
-
nSt
-
111
Index of parameter codes and customer settings
Code
Page
Name
LEt
89
[External fault config]
LFF
91
[Fallback speed]
Unit
Value/Possible function
LO
-
Customer
setting
HIG
[4-20mA loss]
-
-
FSt
91
0 to 500
nO
YES
LFL
Hz
HIG
[Active low]: The external fault is detected when the
logic input assigned to EtF changes to state 0
[Active high]: The external fault is detected when the
logic input or bit assigned to EtF changes to state 1
Factory
setting
[Ignore]: Ignore
[Freewheel]: Detected fault management with
freewheel stop
[fallback spd]: The drive switches to the fallback speed.
[Spd maint.]: The drive maintains the speed at which it
was operating when the fault occurred.
[Ramp stop]: Detected fault management with stop on
ramp
[Fast stop] : Detected fault management with fast stop
[Brake control]: Brake control detected fault
[Incorrect config.]: Incorrect configuration
[Invalid config.]: Invalid configuration
[NETWORK FAULT]: Communication detected fault on the communication card
[CANopen com.]: Communication detected fault line 2 (CANopen)
[Capa.charg]: Capacitor precharge detected fault
[EEPROM]: EEPROM memory detected fault
[External]: External fault
[INTERNAL FAULT]: Unknown rating
[INTERNAL FAULT]: HMI card not recognized or incompatible/display absent
[INTERNAL FAULT]: EEPROM detected fault
[INTERNAL FAULT]: Industrial EEPROM detected fault
[4-20mA]: 4-20 mA loss
[No fault]: No fault code saved
[Overbraking]: DC bus overvoltage
[Overcurrent]: Overcurrent
[Drive overheat]: Drive overheating
[Motor overload]: Motor overload
[Mot. phase]: Motor phase loss
[Mains overvoltage]: Line supply overvoltage
[Mains phase loss]: Line phase loss
[Mot. short circuit]: Motor short-circuit (phase, ground)
[Overspeed]: Motor overspeed
[Auto-tuning]: Auto-tuning detected fault
[Undervoltage]: Line supply undervoltage
LFF
rLS
rNP
10
YES
LFt
98
[Last fault occurred]
-
bLF
CFF
CFI
CnF
COF
CrF
EEF
EPF
IF1
IF2
IF3
IF4
LFF
nOF
ObF
OCF
OHF
OLF
OPF
OSF
PHF
SCF
SOF
tnF
USF
LI1A
100
[Config.LI1]
-
-
LI2A
100
[Config.LI2]
-
-
LI3A
100
[Config.LI3]
-
-
LI4A
100
[Config.LI4]
-
-
LI5A
100
[Config.LI5]
-
-
Not applicable
LI6A
100
[Config.LI6]
-
-
Not applicable
LSP
30
81
[Low speed]
Hz
0 to HSP
-
0
nCr
38
[Rated mot. current]
In
0.25 to 1.5
-
In accordance
with the
drive rating
nCr2
84
[Nom. mot. 2 current]
In
0.25 to 1.5
-
In accordance
with the
drive rating
nrd
41
[Noise reduction]
-
YES
nO
[Yes]: Frequency with random modulation
[No]: Fixed frequency
112
YES
Index of parameter codes and customer settings
Code
Page
nSP
nSP2
OHL
Unit
39
[Rated motor speed]
rpm
0 to 32,760
-
84
[Nom. mot. 2 speed]
rpm
0 to 32,760
-
In accordance
with the
drive rating
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
[No]: Not assigned
[LI1]: Logic input LI1
[LI2]: Logic input LI2
[LI3]: Logic input LI3
[LI4]: Logic input LI4
[LI5]: Not applicable
[LI6]: Not applicable
[Ignore]: Ignore
[Freewheel]: Detected fault management with freewheel
stop
[Ramp stop]: Detected fault management with stop on
ramp
[Fast stop]: Detected fault management with fast stop
YES
[Ignore]: Ignore
[Freewheel]: Detected fault management with freewheel
stop
[Ramp stop]: Detected fault management with stop on
ramp
[Fast stop]: Detected fault management with fast stop
YES
nO
YES
OAC
[No]: Function inactive
[Yes]: Tripping on OPF
[Output cut]: No tripping on [MOTOR PHASE LOSS]
(OPF), but output voltage is managed
YES
64
90
[Freewheel stop ass.]
[Overtemp fault mgt]
-
-
rNP
FSt
nO
YES
OLL
Customer
setting
In accordance
with the
drive rating
nO
YES
nSt
Value/Possible function
Factory
setting
Name
90
[Overload fault mgt]
-
rNP
FSt
nO
OPL
90
[Output Phase Loss]
-
Opr
97
[Motor power]
%
-
-
-
Otr
98
[Motor torque]
%
-
-
-
PIC
33
77
[PID correct. reverse]
-
nO
YES
[No]: Normal
[Yes]: Reverse
nO
-
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
[No]: Not assigned
[AI1]: Not applicable
[AI2]: Analog input AI2
[AI3]: Analog input AI3
nO
nO
[No]: The reference for the PI regulator is Fr1, except
for UPdH and UPdt
[Yes]: The reference for the PI regulator is provided
internally via the rPI parameter
nO
[No]: Not assigned
[LI1]: Logic input LI1
[LI2]: Logic input LI2
[LI3]: Logic input LI3
[LI4]: Logic input LI4
[LI5]: Not applicable
[LI6]: Not applicable
[CD11]: Bit 11 of the control word from a communication
network
[CD12]: Bit 12 of the control word from a communication
network
[CD13]: Bit 13 of the control word from a communication
network
[CD14]: Bit 14 of the control word from a communication
network
[CD15]: Bit 15 of the control word from a communication
network
nO
PIF
PII
77
79
[PID feedback ass.]
[Act. internal PID ref.]
-
YES
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
Cd11
Pr2
77
[2 preset PID ref.]
Cd12
Cd13
Cd14
Cd15
113
Index of parameter codes and customer settings
Code
Pr4
PS16
PS2
PS4
Page
78
70
69
69
Name
[4 preset PID ref.]
[16 preset speeds]
[2 preset speeds]
[4 preset speeds]
Unit
Value/Possible function
-
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
Cd11
Cd12
Cd13
Cd14
Cd15
[No]: Not assigned
[LI1]: Logic input LI1
[LI2]: Logic input LI2
[LI3]: Logic input LI3
[LI4]: Logic input LI4
[LI5]: Not applicable
[LI6]: Not applicable
[CD11]: Bit 11 of the control word from a communication network
[CD12]: Bit 12 of the control word from a communication network
[CD13]: Bit 13 of the control word from a communication network
[CD14]: Bit 14 of the control word from a communication network
[CD15]: Bit 15 of the control word from a communication network
nO
-
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
Cd11
Cd12
Cd13
Cd14
Cd15
[No]: Not assigned
[LI1]: Logic input LI1
[LI2]: Logic input LI2
[LI3]: Logic input LI3
[LI4]: Logic input LI4
[LI5]: Not applicable
[LI6]: Not applicable
[CD11]: Bit 11 of the control word from a communication network
[CD12]: Bit 12 of the control word from a communication network
[CD13]: Bit 13 of the control word from a communication network
[CD14]: Bit 14 of the control word from a communication network
[CD15]: Bit 15 of the control word from a communication network
nO
-
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
Cd11
Cd12
Cd13
Cd14
Cd15
[No]: Not assigned
[LI1]: Logic input LI1
[LI2]: Logic input LI2
[LI3]: Logic input LI3
[LI4]: Logic input LI4
[LI5]: Not applicable
[LI6]: Not applicable
[CD11]: Bit 11 of the control word from a communication network
[CD12]: Bit 12 of the control word from a communication network
[CD13]: Bit 13 of the control word from a communication network
[CD14]: Bit 14 of the control word from a communication network
[CD15]: Bit 15 of the control word from a communication network
LI3
-
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
Cd11
Cd12
Cd13
Cd14
Cd15
[No]: Not assigned
[LI1]: Logic input LI1
[LI2]: Logic input LI2
[LI3]: Logic input LI3
[LI4]: Logic input LI4
[LI5]: Not applicable
[LI6]: Not applicable
[CD11]: Bit 11 of the control word from a communication network
[CD12]: Bit 12 of the control word from a communication network
[CD13]: Bit 13 of the control word from a communication network
[CD14]: Bit 14 of the control word from a communication network
[CD15]: Bit 15 of the control word from a communication network
LI4
[No]: Not assigned
[LI1]: Logic input LI1
[LI2]: Logic input LI2
[LI3]: Logic input LI3
[LI4]: Logic input LI4
[LI5]: Not applicable
[LI6]: Not applicable
[CD11]: Bit 11 of the control word from a communication network
[CD12]: Bit 12 of the control word from a communication network
[CD13]: Bit 13 of the control word from a communication network
[CD14]: Bit 14 of the control word from a communication network
[CD15]: Bit 15 of the control word from a communication network
nO
[No]: Function inactive
[Yes]: STOP key priority
PS8
69
[8 preset speeds]
-
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
Cd11
Cd12
Cd13
Cd14
Cd15
PSt
58
[Stop Key priority]
-
nO
YES
114
Factory
setting
YES
Customer
setting
Index of parameter codes and customer settings
Code
Page
r1
46
r2
46
Name
[R1 Assignment]
Unit
Value/Possible function
-
Not applicable
[R2 Assignment]
nO
FLt
rUn
FtA
FLA
CtA
SrA
tSA
bLC
APL
LI1 to LI4
[No]: Not assigned
[No drive flt]: No drive detected fault
[Drv running] : Drive running
[Freq.Th.att.]: Frequency threshold reached
[HSP attain.] : High speed reached
[I attained] : Current threshold reached
[Freq.ref.att]: Frequency reference reached
[Th.mot. att.]: Motor thermal threshold reached
[Brk control]: Brake sequence
[4-20mA]: Not applicable
[LI1] to [LI4]: Returns the value of the selected logic input
Fr1
Fr2
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
C111
C112
C113
C114
C115
C211
C212
C213
C214
C215
[ch1 active] : Reference 1
[ch2 active] : Reference 2
[LI1]: Logic input LI1
[LI2]: Logic input LI2
[LI3]: Logic input LI3
[LI4]: Logic input LI4
[LI5]: Not applicable
[LI6]: Not applicable
[C111]: Not applicable
[C112]: Not applicable
[C113]: Not applicable
[C114]: Not applicable
[C115]: Not applicable
[C211]: Bit 11 of network control word
[C212]: Bit 12 of network control word
[C213]: Bit 13 of network control word
[C214]: Bit 14 of network control word
[C215]: Bit 15 of network control word
-
Factory
setting
Customer
setting
FLt
nO
rFC
56
[Ref. 2 switching]
rFr
97
[Output frequency]
Hz
-500 to +500
-
-
rIG
33
77
[PID integral gain]
-
0.01 to 100
-
1
rOt
58
[Rotating direction]
-
dFr
drS
bOt
[Forward]: Forward
[Reverse]: Reverse
[Both]: Both directions are authorized
rp
93
[Product reset]
-
nO
YES
[No]: No
[Yes]: Yes
nO
rP2
33
78
[Preset ref. PID 2]
%
0 to 100
-
30
rp3
33
78
[Preset ref. PID 3]
%
0 to 100
-
60
rp4
33
78
[Preset ref. PID 4]
%
0 to 100
-
90
rPG
33
77
[PID prop. gain]
-
0.01 to 100
-
1
rPI
29
79
97
[Internal PID ref.]
%
0 to 100
-
0
rPr
93
[Operating t. reset]
-
nO
rtH
[No]: No
[rst. runtime]: Operating time reset to zero
Fr1
dFr
nO
115
Index of parameter codes and customer settings
Code
Page
Name
Unit
Value/Possible function
[No]: Not assigned
[LI1]: Logic input LI1
[LI2]: Logic input LI2
[LI3]: Logic input LI3
[LI4]: Logic input LI4
[LI5]: Not applicable
[LI6]: Not applicable
[CD11]: Bit 11 of the control word from a communication network
[CD12]: Bit 12 of the control word from a communication network
[CD13]: Bit 13 of the control word from a communication network
[CD14]: Bit 14 of the control word from a communication network
[CD15]: Bit 15 of the control word from a communication network
Factory
setting
rPS
61
[Ramp switch ass.]
-
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
Cd11
Cd12
Cd13
Cd14
Cd15
rPt
59
[Ramp type]
-
LIn
S
U
CUS
[Linear]: Linear
[S ramp]: S ramp
[U ramp]: U ramp
[Customized]: Customized
LIn
[No]: Not assigned
[LI1]: Logic input LI1
[LI2]: Logic input LI2 can be accessed if tCC = 2C.
[LI3]: Logic input LI3
[LI4]: Logic input LI4
[LI5]: Not applicable
[LI6]: Not applicable
LI2
nO
rrS
45
[Reverse assign.]
-
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
rSC
39
[Cold stator resist.]
-
nO
InIt
8888
[NO]: Function inactive
[Init]: Activates the function
Value of cold state stator resistance used
nO
[No]: Not assigned
[LI1]: Logic input LI1
[LI2]: Logic input LI2
[LI3]: Logic input LI3
[LI4]: Logic input LI4
[LI5]: Not applicable
[LI6]: Not applicable
nO
rSF
88
[Fault reset]
-
nO
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
rSL
35
79
[PID wake up thresh.]
%
0
to 100
-
0
rtH
98
[Run time]
-
-
-
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
AIU1
LCC
Ndb
nEt
[No]: Not assigned
[AI1]: Not applicable
[AI2]: Analog input AI2
[AI3]: Analog input AI3
[AI Virtual 1]: Jog dial
[HMI]: Reference via the remote display terminal
[Modbus]: Not applicable
[Com. card]: Reference via network
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
AIU1
LCC
Ndb
nEt
[No]: Not assigned
[AI1]: Not applicable
[AI2]: Analog input AI2
[AI3]: Analog input AI3
[AI Virtual 1]: Jog dial
[HMI]: Reference via the remote display terminal
[Modbus]: Not applicable
[Com. card]: Reference via network
nO
StrI
[No]: Function inactive
[Config 1] : Saves the current configuration to EEPROM
SA2
67
[Summing ref. 2]
Time
-
AI2
SA3
67
[Summing ref. 3]
-
SCS
42
46
58
[Saving config.]
-
SdC1
32
65
[Auto DC inj. level 1]
In
0
to 1.2
-
0.7
SdC2
32
66
[Auto DC inj. level 2]
In
0
to 1.2
-
0.5
SdS
37
[Scale factor display]
-
0.1
to 200
-
30
116
nO
nO
Customer
setting
Index of parameter codes and customer settings
Code
Page
Name
Unit
SFr
37
41
[Switching freq.]
kHz
SLL
91
[Modbus fault mgt]
SLP
31
[Slip compensation]
%
SLP2
36
84
[Slip compensation 2]
%
SP10
34
70
[Preset speed 10]
Hz
SP11
34
71
[Preset speed 11]
SP12
34
71
SP13
Value/Possible function
2.0 to 16
-
Factory
setting
Customer
setting
4
Not applicable
FSt
0 to 150
-
100
0 to 150
-
100
0 to 500
-
50
Hz
0 to 500
-
55
[Preset speed 12]
Hz
0 to 500
-
60
34
71
[Preset speed 13]
Hz
0 to 500
-
70
SP14
34
71
[Preset speed 14]
Hz
0 to 500
-
80
SP15
34
71
[Preset speed 15]
Hz
0 to 500
-
90
SP16
34
71
[Preset speed 16]
Hz
0 to 500
-
100
SP2
33
70
[Preset speed 2]
Hz
0 to 500
-
10
SP3
34
70
[Preset speed 3]
Hz
0 to 500
-
15
SP4
34
70
[Preset speed 4]
Hz
0 to 500
-
20
SP5
34
70
[Preset speed 5]
Hz
0 to 500
-
25
SP6
34
70
[Preset speed 6]
Hz
0 to 500
-
30
SP7
34
70
[Preset speed 7]
Hz
0 to 500
-
35
SP8
34
70
[Preset speed 8]
Hz
0 to 500
-
40
SP9
34
70
[Preset speed 9]
Hz
0 to 500
-
45
SPd1
97
[Cust. output value]
-
-
-
-
SPd2
97
[Cust. output value]
-
-
-
-
SPd3
97
[Cust. output value]
-
-
-
-
SrF
41
[Speed loop filter]
-
nO
YES
[No]: Filter remains active
[Yes]: Filter suppressed
nO
StA
31
[Fr.Loop.Stab]
%
1 to 100
-
20
StA2
36
84
[Freq. loop stability 2]
%
0 to 100
-
20
117
Index of parameter codes and customer settings
Code
Page
Name
Unit
Value/Possible function
Factory
setting
nO
rMP
FSt
[No]: Locking of the drive and freewheel stopping of the motor
[DC Maintain]: Stop mode using inertia to maintain the drive
power supply as long as possible
[Ramp stop]: Stop according to the valid ramp
[Fast stop]: Fast stop
nO
nO
NNS
StP
92
[UnderV. prevention]
-
Str
74
[Reference saved]
-
nO
rAN
EEP
[No]: No saving
[RAM]: Saving in RAM
[EEprom]: Saving in EEPROM
Stt
62
[Type of stop]
-
rMP
FSt
nSt
dCI
[Ramp stop]: On ramp
[Fast stop]: Fast stop
[Freewheel]: Freewheel stop
[DC injection]: DC injection stop
tA1
30
60
[Begin Acc round]
%
0 to 100
-
10
tA2
30
60
[End Acc round]
%
0 to
(100-tA1)
-
10
tA3
30
60
[Begin Dec round]
%
0 to 100
-
10
tA4
30
60
[End Dec round]
%
0 to
(100-tA3)
-
10
-
5
10
30
1h
2h
3h
Ct
[5 minutes]: 5 minutes
[10 minutes]: 10 minutes
[30 minutes]: 30 minutes
[1 hour]: 1 hour
[2 hours]: 2 hours
[3 hours]: 3 hours
[Unlimited]: Unlimited
tAr
88
[Max. restart time]
tbr
94
[Modbus baud rate]
tCC
27
44
[2/3 wire control]
Not applicable
-
rMP
5
19.2
2C
3C
LOC
[2 wire]: 2-wire control
[3 wire]: 3-wire control
[Local]: Local control (drive RUN/STOP/RESET)
LEL
trn
PFO
[Level]: State 0 or 1
[Transition]: Change of state (transition or edge)
[Fwd priority]: State 0 or 1, " forward " input takes priority over
the " reverse " input
trn
2C
tCt
44
[2 wire type]
-
tdC
31
64
[DC injection time 2]
s
0.1 to 30
-
0.5
tdC1
32
65
[Auto DC inj. time 1]
s
0.1 to 30
-
0.5
tdC2
32
66
[Auto DC inj. time 2]
s
0 to 30
-
0
tFO
94
[Modbus format]
-
tFr
41
[Max frequency]
Hz
tHd
97
[Drv. Therm att.]
tHr
97
tLS
35
118
Not applicable
8E1
10 to 500
-
60
-
-
-
-
[Motor thermal state]
-
-
-
-
[Low speed time out]
s
0 to 999.9
-
0
Customer
setting
Index of parameter codes and customer settings
Name
Unit
Value/Possible function
Factory
setting
Code
Page
tnL
91
[Autotune fault mgt]
-
nO
YES
[No]: Ignore
[Yes]: Detected fault management with drive locked
YES
ttd
36
[Motor therm. level]
%
1 to 118
-
100
ttO
94
[Modbus time out]
s
Customer
setting
Not applicable
nO
YES
dOnE
tUn
40
[Auto tuning]
-
rUn
POn
LI1 to LI4
tAb
tUS
40
99
[Auto tuning state]
-
PEnd
PrOG
FAIL
dOnE
Strd
10
[No]: Auto-tuning not performed
[Yes]: Auto-tuning performed as soon as possible
[Done]: Use of the values given the last time auto-tuning
was performed
[Drv running]: Auto-tuning performed every time a run
command is sent
[Power on]: Auto-tuning performed on every power-up
[LI1] to [LI4]: Auto-tuning performed on the transition from
0 V 1 of a logic input assigned to this function
nO
[Not done]: Default stator resistance value used to control
the motor
[Pending]: Auto-tuning requested but not yet performed
[In progress]: Auto-tuning in progress
[Failed]: Auto-tuning failed
[Done]: Stator resistance measured by the auto-tuning
function used to control the motor
[Entered R1]: Cold state stator resistance used to control
the motor
tAb
UdP
99
[Drv.Soft.Ver]
-
-
-
-
UFr
30
[IR compensation]
%
0 to 100
-
20
UFr2
35
84
[IR compensation
2]
%
0 to 100
-
20
UFt
41
[U/F mot 1
selected]
-
L
P
n
nLd
[Cst. torque]: Constant torque
[Var. torque] : Variable torque
[SVC]: Flux vector control
[Energy sav.]: Energy saving
n
UFt2
84
[U/F mot.2
selected]
-
L
P
n
nLd
[Cst. torque]: Constant torque
[Var. torque] : Variable torque
[SVC]: Flux vector control
[Energy sav.]: Energy saving
n
ULn
97
[Mains voltage]
V
-
-
-
UnS
38
[Rated motor volt.]
V
-
-
In accordance
with the
drive rating
UnS2
83
[Nom. mot. 2 volt.]
V
-
-
In accordance
with the
drive rating
119
" ACOPOSinverter X64 - Communication Parameters
Version: 0.20 (April 2011) " ,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,
" DANGER " ,,,,,,,,,,
" UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
*Read and understand this document and the User Manual before installing or operating the ACOPOSinverter X64 drive.
*Any changes made to the parameter settings must be performed by qualified personnel.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury. " ,,,,,,,,,,
" WARNING " ,,,,,,,,,,
" LOSS OF CONTROL
*The designer of any control scheme must
- consider the potential failure modes of control paths and, for certain critical control functions,
- provide a means to achieve a safe state during and after a path failure.
Examples of critical control functions are emergency stop and overtravel stop.
*Separate or redundant control paths must be provided for critical control functions.
*System control paths may include communication links. Consideration must be given to the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of the link. (see note a.)
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage. " ,,,,,,,,,,
" Note a.: For additional information, refer to NEMA ICS 1.1 (latest edition), ``Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Control'' and to NEMA ICS 7.1 (latest edition), ``Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation and Operation of Adjustable-Speed Drive Systems.'' " ,,,,,,,,,,
" Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by
B & R for any consequences arising out of the use of this product. " ,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,
" Code " , " name " , " X2X register " , " CANopen index " , " Link " , " Category " , " Access " , " Type " , " 1 s " , " Factory setting " , " Range " , " Display " , " Menu " , " Order "
" [Code*]_Input/_Output " ,,,,,,,,,,,,,
" CMDD
CMD " , " Control word " , " 16#0802
16#2327 " , " 16#6040/00
16#2037/2 " , " CMD " , " Control parameters " , " R/W " , " WORD (BitString16) " , " - " , " " , " - " , " [Cmd value] (CMd) " ,, " 1 "
" LFRD " , " Speed setpoint " , " 16#080A/16#2495 " , " 16#6042/00 " , " - " , " Setpoint parameters " , " R/W " , " INT (Signed16) " , " 1 rpm " , " 0 rpm " , " - " ,,, " 2 "
" LFR " , " Frequency reference via the bus " , " 16#080A/16#2328 " , " 16#2037/3 " , " - " , " Setpoint parameters " , " R/W " , " INT (Signed16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " 0.0 Hz " , " -3276.7 Hz ... 3276.7 Hz " , " [HMI Frequency ref.] (LFr) " ,, " 3 "
" PISP " , " PI regulator reference via the bus " , " 16#2327 " , " 16#2037/4 " , " - " , " Setpoint parameters " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 % " , " " , " 0.0 ... 100.0 % " ,,, " 4 "
" CMI " , " Extended control word " , " 16#0812 " , " 16#2037/5 " , " CMI " , " Control parameters " , " R/W " , " WORD (BitString16) " , " - " , " " , " - " ,,, " 5 "
" ETAD
ETA " , " Status word " , " 16#0802
16#214E " , " 16#6041/00
16#2002/2 " , " ETA " , " Status parameters " , " R " , " WORD (BitString16) " , " - " , " " , " - " , " [ETA state word] (EtA) " ,, " 6 "
" RFRD " , " Output speed " , " 16#080A/16#2497 " , " 16#6044/00 " , " - " , " Actual values parameters " , " R " , " INT (Signed16) " , " 1 rpm " , " " , " - " ,,, " 7 "
" RFR " , " Output frequency applied to the motor " , " 16#080A/16#214F " , " 16#2002/3 " , " - " , " Actual values parameters " , " R " , " INT (Signed16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " " , " -3276.7 Hz ... 3276.7 Hz " , " [Output frequency] (rFr) " ,, " 8 "
" FRHD " , " Speed reference before ramp " , " 16#2496 " , " 16#6043/00 " , " - " , " Reference parameters " , " R " , " INT (Signed16) " , " 1 rpm " , " " , " - " ,,, " 9 "
" FRH " , " Frequency reference before ramp " , " 16#2150 " , " 16#2002/4 " , " - " , " Reference parameters " , " R " , " INT (Signed16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " " , " - " , " [Frequency ref.] (FrH) " ,, " 10 "
" ERRD " , " CiA402 fault code " , " 16#083A " , " 16#603F/00 " , " ERRD " , " Fault parameters " , " R " , " WORD (BitString16) " , " - " , " " , " - " ,,, " 11 "
" LCR " , " Current in the motor " , " 16#0822 " , " 16#2002/5 " , " - " , " Actual values parameters " , " R " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 A " , " " , " - " , " [Motor current] (LCr) " ,, " 12 "
" OTR " , " Motor torque " , " 16#081A " , " 16#2002/6 " , " - " , " Actual values parameters " , " R " , " INT (Signed16) " , " 1 % " , " " , " 0 ... 100 % " , " [Motor torque] (Otr) " ,, " 13 "
" OPR " , " Motor power " , " 16#2158 " , " 16#2002/C " , " - " , " Actual values parameters " , " R " , " INT (Signed16) " , " 1 % " , " " , " 0 ... 100 % " , " [Motor power] (OPr) " ,, " 14 "
" ULN " , " Mains voltage " , " 16#2154 " , " 16#2002/8 " , " - " , " Measurement parameters " , " R " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 V " , " " , " - " , " [Mains voltage] (ULn) " ,, " 15 "
" THD " , " Drive thermal state " , " 16#082A " , " 16#2002/A " , " - " , " Measurement parameters " , " R " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 1 % " , " " , " - " , " [Drv. thermal state] (tHd) " ,, " 16 "
" TDM " , " Max. thermal state reached by the drive " , " 16#2157 " , " 16#2002/B " , " TDM " , " Actual values parameters " , " R " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 1 % " ,, " - " ,,, " 17 "
" THR " , " Motor thermal state " , " 16#0832 " , " 16#2042/1F " , " - " , " Measurement parameters " , " R " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 1 % " , " " , " - " , " [Motor thermal state] (tHr) " ,, " 18 "
" RTH " , " Operating time " , " 16#216C " , " 16#2002/20 " , " - " , " Measurement parameters " , " R " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 1 Hour " , " 0 " , " 0 ... 65535 Hours " , " [Run time] (rtH) " ,, " 19 "
" USPL " , " Motor speed in customer units - Low order " , " 16#248B " , " 16#205A/3 " , " - " , " Measurement parameters " , " R " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 1 " ,, " USPL= RFR x SDS " ,,, " 20 "
" USPH " , " Motor speed in customer units - High order " , " 16#248C " , " 16#205A/4 " , " - " , " Measurement parameters " , " R " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 1 " ,, " USPH= RFR x SDS " ,,, " 21 "
" ETI " , " Extended status word " , " 16#0812 " , " 16#2002/7 " , " ETI " , " Status parameters " , " R " , " WORD (BitString16) " , " - " , " " , " - " ,,, " 22 "
" LRS1 " , " Extended status word No. 1 " , " 16#217F " , " 16#2002/33 " , " LRS1 " , " Status parameters " , " R " , " WORD (BitString16) " , " - " , " " , " - " ,,, " 23 "
" LRS3 " , " Extended status word No. 3 " , " 16#2181 " , " 16#2002/35 " , " LRS3 " , " Status parameters " , " R " , " WORD (BitString16) " , " - " , " " , " - " ,,, " 24 "
" IOLR " , " Value of logic I/O " , " R: 16#084A W:16#081A " , " 16#2016/29 " , " IOLR " , " I/O parameters " , " R/W " , " WORD (BitString16) " , " - " , " " , " - " ,,, " 25 "
" AI1C " , " Value of analog input AI1 " , " 16#2206 " , " 16#2016/2B " , " - " , " I/O parameters " , " R " , " INT (Signed16) " , " 1 mV " , " " , " 0 ... 10000 mV " ,,, " 26 "
" AI2C " , " Value of analog input AI2 " , " 16#2207 " , " 16#2016/2C " , " - " , " I/O parameters " , " R " , " INT (Signed16) " , " 1 mV " , " " , " -10000 ... 10000 mV " ,,, " 27 "
" AI3C " , " Value of analog input AI3 " , " 16#2208 " , " 16#2016/2D " , " - " , " I/O parameters " , " R " , " INT (Signed16) " , " 1 µA " , " " , " 0 ... 20000 µA " ,,, " 28 "
" AO1R " , " Value of the analog output " , " 16#2219 " , " 16#2016/3E " , " - " , " I/O parameters " , " R/W " , " INT (Signed16) " , " 1 " , " " , " 0 ... 10000 " ,,, " 29 "
" AIV1 " , " Image input AIV1 " , " 16#222D " , " 16#2016/52 " , " - " , " Reference parameters " , " R " , " INT (Signed16) " , " 1 % " ,, " 0 ... 100 % " , " [Image input AIV1] (AIV1) " ,, " 30 "
" LFT " , " Last detected fault " , " 16#0842 " , " 16#2029/16 " , " LFT " , " Fault parameters " , " R " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " " , " - " ,,, " 31 "
" DP1 " , " Past detected fault No. 1 " , " 16#22E8 " , " 16#202A/2 " , " LFT " , " History parameters " , " R " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " " , " - " ,,, " 32 "
" DP2 " , " Past detected fault No. 2 " , " 16#22E9 " , " 16#202A/3 " , " LFT " , " History parameters " , " R " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " " , " - " ,,, " 33 "
" DP3 " , " Past detected fault No. 3 " , " 16#22EA " , " 16#202A/4 " , " LFT " , " History parameters " , " R " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " " , " - " ,,, " 34 "
" DP4 " , " Past detected fault No. 4 " , " 16#22EB " , " 16#202A/5 " , " LFT " , " History parameters " , " R " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " " , " - " ,,, " 35 "
" EP1 " , " Status of past detected fault No. 1 " , " 16#22F2 " , " 16#202A/C " , " ETA " , " History parameters " , " R " , " WORD (BitString16) " , " - " , " " , " - " ,,, " 36 "
" EP2 " , " Status of past detected fault No. 2 " , " 16#22F3 " , " 16#202A/D " , " ETA " , " History parameters " , " R " , " WORD (BitString16) " , " - " , " " , " - " ,,, " 37 "
" EP3 " , " Status of past detected fault No. 3 " , " 16#22F4 " , " 16#202A/E " , " ETA " , " History parameters " , " R " , " WORD (BitString16) " , " - " , " " , " - " ,,, " 38 "
" EP4 " , " Status of past detected fault No. 4 " , " 16#22F5 " , " 16#202A/F " , " ETA " , " History parameters " , " R " , " WORD (BitString16) " , " - " , " " , " - " ,,, " 39 "
" ERCO " , " CANopen: error word " , " 16#2267 " , " 16#201E/39 " , " ERCO " , " Configuration and settings " , " R " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " " , " - " , " [Error code] (ErCO) " ,, " 40 "
" CMI1 " , " Image of Modbus extended control word " , " 16#234F " , " 16#2037/2A " , " - " , " Control parameters " , " R " , " WORD (BitString16) " , " - " ,, " - " ,,, " 41 "
" CMI2 " , " Image of CANopen extended control word " , " 16#2350 " , " 16#2037/2B " , " - " , " Control parameters " , " R " , " WORD (BitString16) " , " - " ,, " - " ,,, " 42 "
" LFR1 " , " Image of Modbus frequency reference " , " 16#233B " , " 16#2037/16 " , " - " , " Setpoint parameters " , " R " , " INT (Signed16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " 0.0 Hz " , " -3276.7 Hz ... 3276.7 Hz " ,,, " 43 "
" LFR2 " , " Image of CANopen frequency reference " , " 16#233C " , " 16#2037/17 " , " - " , " Setpoint parameters " , " R " , " INT (Signed16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " 0.0 Hz " , " -3276.7 Hz ... 3276.7 Hz " ,,, " 44 "
" PIR1 " , " Image of Modbus PI reference " , " 16#2345 " , " 16#2037/20 " , " - " , " Setpoint parameters " , " R " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 % " ,, " 0.0 ... 100.0 % " ,,, " 45 "
" PIR2 " , " Image of CANopen PI reference " , " 16#2346 " , " 16#2037/21 " , " - " , " Setpoint parameters " , " R " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 % " ,, " 0.0 ... 100.0 % " ,,, " 46 "
" NCV " , " Drive rating " , " 16#210C " , " 16#2000/C " , " NCV " , " Identification parameters " , " R " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " ,, " - " ,,, " 47 "
" VCAL " , " Drive voltage " , " 16#210D " , " 16#2000/D " , " VCAL " , " Identification parameters " , " R " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " ,, " - " ,,, " 48 "
" INV " , " Nominal drive current " , " 16#2112 " , " 16#2000/12 " , " - " , " Identification parameters " , " R " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 A " ,, " - " ,,, " 49 "
" TSP " , " Drive firmware type " , " 16#2188 " , " 16#2004/2 " , " - " , " Identification parameters " , " R " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " - " ,, " 128= ACOPOSinverter X64 " ,,, " 50 "
" UdP " , " Drive firmware version " , " 16#2185 " , " 16#2003/3 " , " UDP " , " Identification parameters " , " R " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " ,, " - " , " [Drv.Soft.Ver] (UdP) " ,, " 51 "
" LSP " , " Low speed " , " 16#213C " , " 16#2001/6 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " 0.0 Hz " , " 0.0 Hz ... (HSP) " , " [Low speed] (LSP) " ,, " 52 "
" HSP " , " High speed " , " 16#213B " , " 16#2001/5 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " Refer to programming manual " , " (LSP) ... (tFr) " , " [High speed] (HSP) " ,, " 53 "
" ITH " , " Motor thermal protection - max. thermal current " , " 16#23A8 " , " 16#2042/17 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 A " , " Depends of rating " , " Refer to programming manual " , " [Mot. therm. current] (ItH) " ,, " 54 "
" UFR " , " IR compensation/Voltage boost " , " 16#23A9 " , " 16#2042/18 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 1 % " , " 20 % " , " 0 % ... 100 % " , " [IR compensation] (UFr) " ,, " 55 "
" FLG " , " Frequency loop gain " , " 16#23A6 " , " 16#2042/15 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 1 % " , " 20 % " , " 1 % ... 100 % " , " [FreqLoopGain] (FLG) " ,, " 56 "
" STA " , " Frequency loop stability " , " 16#23A7 " , " 16#2042/16 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 1 % " , " 20 % " , " 1 % ... 100 % " , " [Fr.Loop.Stab] (StA) " ,, " 57 "
" SLP " , " Slip compensation " , " 16#23AB " , " 16#2042/1A " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 1 % " , " 100 % " , " 0 % ... 150 % " , " [Slip compensation] (SLP) " ,, " 58 "
" JPF " , " Skip Frequency " , " 16#241D " , " 16#2053/2 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " 0.0 " , " 0.0 ... 500.0 Hz " , " [Skip Frequency] (JPF) " ,, " 59 "
" JF2 " , " 2nd skip frequency " , " 16#241E " , " 16#2053/3 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " 0.0 " , " 0.0 ... 500.0 Hz " , " [Skip Frequency 2] (JF2) " ,, " 60 "
" CLI " , " Current Limitation " , " 16#238E " , " 16#203E/2 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 A " , " Depends of rating " , " Refer to programming manual " , " [Current Limitation] (CLI) " ,, " 61 "
" TLS " , " Low speed operating time " , " 16#2445 " , " 16#2057/2 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 s " , " 0.0 s " , " 0.0 ... 999.9 s " , " [Low speed time out] (tLS) " ,, " 62 "
" FTD " , " Motor frequency threshold " , " 16#23ED " , " 16#2050/4 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " Refer to programming manual " , " 0.0 ... 500.0 Hz " , " [Freq. threshold] (Ftd) " ,, " 63 "
" TTD " , " Motor thermal state threshold " , " 16#23EC " , " 16#2050/3 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 1 % " , " 100 % " , " 0 % ... 118 % " , " [Motor therm. level] (ttd) " ,, " 64 "
" CTD " , " Motor current threshold " , " 16#23EB " , " 16#2050/2 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 A " , " Depends of rating " , " Refer to programming manual " , " [Current threshold] (Ctd) " ,, " 65 "
" SDS " , " USPL/USPH scale factor " , " 16#248A " , " 16#205A / 2 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 " , " 300 " , " 0 ...2000 " , " [Skal.faktor rFr/SPdx] (SdS) " ,, " 66 "
" BFR " , " Standard motor frequency " , " 16#2110 " , " 16#2000/10 " , " BFR " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [50Hz IEC] (50) " , " - " , " [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) " ,, " 67 "
" UNS " , " Nominal motor voltage given on the rating plate " , " 16#2393 " , " 16#2042/2 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 1 V " , " Depends of rating " , " Depends of rating " , " [Rated motor volt.] (UnS) " ,, " 68 "
" FRS " , " Nominal motor frequency given on the rating plate " , " 16#2394 " , " 16#2042/3 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " Refer to programming manual " , " 10.0 Hz ... 500.0 Hz " , " [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) " ,, " 69 "
" NCR " , " Nominal motor current given on the rating plate " , " 16#2395 " , " 16#2042/4 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 A " , " Depends of rating " , " Refer to programming manual " , " [Rated mot. current] (nCr) " ,, " 70 "
" NSP " , " Nominal motor speed given on the rating plate " , " 16#2396 " , " 16#2042/5 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 1 rpm " , " Depends of rating " , " 0 ... 32767 rpm " , " [Rated motor speed] (nSP) " ,, " 71 "
" COS " , " Motor Cos Phi given on the rating plate " , " 16#2398 " , " 16#2042/7 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.01 " , " Depends of rating " , " 50 ... 100 " , " [Motor 1 Cosinus Phi] (COS) " ,, " 72 "
" rSC " , " Cold state stator resistance " , " 16#23BD " , " 16#2042/2C " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 1 m? " , " 0 " , " 2 ... 9999 m? " , " [Cold stator resist.] (rSC) " ,, " 73 "
" TUN " , " Motor control auto-tuning " , " 16#239A " , " 16#2042/9 " , " TUN " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WO " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [Auto tuning] (tUn) " ,, " 74 "
" TUS " , " Auto-tuning status " , " 16#239B " , " 16#2042/A " , " ACT " , " Configuration and settings " , " R " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [Not done] (tAb) " , " - " , " [Auto tuning state] (tUS) " ,, " 75 "
" UFT " , " Selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio " , " 16#2399 " , " 16#2042/8 " , " UFT " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [SVC] (n) " , " - " , " [U/F mot 1 selected] (UFt) " ,, " 76 "
" NRD " , " Noise reduction " , " 16#213E " , " 16#2001/8 " , " N_Y " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [Yes] (YES) " , " - " , " [Noise reduction] (nrd) " ,, " 77 "
" SFR " , " Switching frequency " , " 16#2139 " , " 16#2001/3 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 kHz " , " 4.0 kHz " , " 2.0 kHz ... 16.0 kHz " , " [Switching freq.] (SFr) " ,, " 78 "
" TFR " , " Maximum output frequency " , " 16#213A " , " 16#2001/4 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " Refer to programming manual " , " 10.0 Hz ... 500.0 Hz " , " [Max frequency] (tFr) " ,, " 79 "
" SRF " , " Suppression of the speed loop filter " , " 16#238B " , " 16#203D/2 " , " N_Y " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [Speed loop filter] (SrF) " ,, " 80 "
" SCS " , " Saving the configuration " , " 16#22F8 " , " 16#2032/2 " , " SCS " , " Configuration management " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [Saving config.] (SCS) " ,, " 81 "
" CFG " , " Source configuration " , " 16#2135 " , " 16#2000/35 " , " CFG " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [Factory set.] (Std) " , " - " , " [Macro configuration] (CFG) " ,, " 82 "
" FCS " , " Return to factory settings/Restore configuration " , " 16#22F9 " , " 16#2032/3 " , " FCS " , " Configuration management " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [Restore config.] (FCS) " ,, " 83 "
" TCC " , " 2-wire/3-wire control " , " 16#23F0 " , " 16#2051/2 " , " TCC " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [2 wire] (2C) " , " - " , " [2/3 wire control] (tCC) " ,, " 84 "
" TCT " , " Type of 2-wire control " , " 16#23F1 " , " 16#2051/3 " , " TCT " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [Transition] (trn) " , " - " , " [2 wire type] (tCt) " ,, " 85 "
" RRS " , " Reverse operation via logic input " , " 16#23F4 " , " 16#2051/6 " , " PSLIN " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " Refer to programming manual " , " - " , " [Reverse assign.] (rrS) " ,, " 86 "
" CRL3 " , " Value for low speed (LSP) on input AI3 " , " 16#21AC " , " 16#200E/23 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 mA " , " 4.0 mA " , " 0.0 mA ... 20.0 mA " , " [AI3 min. value] (CrL3) " ,, " 87 "
" CRH3 " , " Value for high speed (HSP) on input AI3 " , " 16#21B6 " , " 16#200E/2D " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 mA " , " 20.0 mA " , " 4.0 mA ... 20.0 mA " , " [AI3 max. value] (CrH3) " ,, " 88 "
" AO1T " , " Configuration of the analog output " , " 16#21B9 " , " 16#2010/2 " , " AO1T " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [Current] (0A) " , " - " , " [AO1 Type] (AO1t) " ,, " 89 "
" DO " , " Analog/logic output AOC/AOV " , " 16#21DA " , " 16#2014/20 " , " DO " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [Analog./logic output] (dO) " ,, " 90 "
" R1 " , " Relay r1 " , " 16#21BC " , " 16#2014/2 " , " PSL " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No drive flt] (FLt) " , " - " , " [R1 Assignment] (r1) " ,, " 91 "
" R2 " , " Relay r2 " , " 16#21BD " , " 16#2014/3 " , " PSL " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [R2 Assignment] (r2) " ,, " 92 "
" LAC " , " Function access level " , " 16#2107 " , " 16#2000/7 " , " LAC " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [L1] (L1) " , " - " , " [Access level] (LAC) " ,, " 93 "
" FR1 " , " Configuration reference 1 " , " 16#2311 " , " 16#2036/E " , " PSA " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " Refer to programming manual " , " - " , " [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) " ,, " 94 "
" FR2 " , " Configuration reference 2 " , " 16#2312 " , " 16#2036/F " , " PSA " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " Refer to programming manual " , " - " , " [Ref.2 channel] (Fr2) " ,, " 95 "
" RFC " , " Reference switching " , " 16#230F " , " 16#2036/C " , " PSLIN " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [ch1 active] (Fr1) " , " - " , " [Ref. 2 switching] (rFC) " ,, " 96 "
" CHCF " , " Mixed mode " , " 16#2305 " , " 16#2036/2 " , " CHCF " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [Not separ.] (SIM) " , " - " , " [Profile] (CHCF) " ,, " 97 "
" CD1 " , " Configuration of control channel 1 " , " 16#231B " , " 16#2036/18 " , " CDX " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " Refer to programming manual " , " - " , " [Cmd channel 1] (Cd1) " ,, " 98 "
" CD2 " , " Configuration of control channel 2 " , " 16#231C " , " 16#2036/19 " , " CDX " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " Refer to programming manual " , " - " , " [Cmd channel 2] (Cd2) " ,, " 99 "
" CCS " , " Control channel switching " , " 16#2319 " , " 16#2036/16 " , " PSLIN " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [ch1 active] (Cd1) " , " - " , " [Cmd switching] (CCS) " ,, " 100 "
" COP " , " Copy channel 1 to channel 2 " , " 16#2306 " , " 16#2036/3 " , " COP " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [Copy channel 1 & lt; & gt; 2] (COP) " ,, " 101 "
" LCC " , " Control via remote display terminal " , " 16#2491 " , " 16#2262/4 " , " LCC " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " ,,, " 102 "
" PST " , " Stop priority " , " 16#2490 " , " 16#2262/3 " , " N_Y " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [Yes] (YES) " , " - " , " [Stop Key priority] (PSt) " ,, " 103 "
" ROT " , " Direction of operation authorized " , " 16#248F " , " 16#2262/2 " , " ROT " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [DFR] (DFR) " , " - " , " [Rotattng direction] [rOt] " ,, " 104 "
" RPT " , " Type of ramp " , " 16#2378 " , " 16#203C/5 " , " RPT " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [Linear] (LIn) " , " - " , " [Ramp type] (rPt) " ,, " 105 "
" TA1 " , " Start of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded " , " 16#2379 " , " 16#203C/6 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 1 % " , " 10 % " , " 0 % ... 100 % " , " [Begin Acc round] (tA1) " ,, " 106 "
" TA2 " , " End of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded " , " 16#237A " , " 16#203C/7 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 1 % " , " 10 % " , " 0 % ... 100 - (tA1) % " , " [End Acc round] (tA2) " ,, " 107 "
" TA3 " , " Start of CUS-type deceleration ramp rounded " , " 16#237B " , " 16#203C/8 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 1 % " , " 10 % " , " 0 % ... 100 % " , " [Begin Dec round] (tA3) " ,, " 108 "
" TA4 " , " End of CUS-type deceleration ramp rounded " , " 16#237C " , " 16#203C/9 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 1 % " , " 10 % " , " 0 % ... 100 - (tA3) % " , " [End Dec round] (tA4) " ,, " 109 "
" INR " , " Ramp increment " , " 16#2388 " , " 16#203C/15 " , " INR " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [0.1] (0.1) " , " - " , " [Ramp increment] (Inr) " ,, " 110 "
" ACC " , " Acceleration ramp time " , " 16#2375 " , " 16#203C/2 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " Refer to programming manual " , " Refer to programming manual " , " Refer to programming manual " , " [Acceleration] (ACC) " ,, " 111 "
" DEC " , " Deceleration ramp time " , " 16#2376 " , " 16#203C/3 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " Refer to programming manual " , " Refer to programming manual " , " Refer to programming manual " , " [Deceleration] (dEC) " ,, " 112 "
" RPS " , " Ramp switching " , " 16#237E " , " 16#203C/B " , " PSLIN " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [Ramp switch ass.] (rPS) " ,, " 113 "
" FRT " , " Ramp switching threshold " , " 16#237F " , " 16#203C/C " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " 0.0 Hz " , " 0.0 Hz ... 500.0 Hz " , " [Ramp 2 threshold] (Frt) " ,, " 114 "
" AC2 " , " 2nd acceleration ramp time " , " 16#2380 " , " 16#203C/D " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " Refer to programming manual " , " Refer to programming manual " , " Refer to programming manual " , " [Acceleration 2] (AC2) " ,, " 115 "
" DE2 " , " 2nd deceleration ramp time " , " 16#2381 " , " 16#203C/E " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " Refer to programming manual " , " Refer to programming manual " , " Refer to programming manual " , " [Deceleration 2] (dE2) " ,, " 116 "
" BRA " , " Deceleration ramp adaptation " , " 16#2377 " , " 16#203C/4 " , " BRA " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [Yes] (YES) " , " - " , " [Dec ramp adapt.] (brA) " ,, " 117 "
" STT " , " Normal stop mode " , " 16#23FD " , " 16#2052/2 " , " STT " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [Ramp stop] (rMP) " , " - " , " [Type of stop] (Stt) " ,, " 118 "
" FST " , " Fast stop via logic input " , " 16#2400 " , " 16#2052/5 " , " PSLIN " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [Fast stop assign.] (FSt) " ,, " 119 "
" DCF " , " Coefficient for dividing the deceleration ramp time for fast stopping " , " 16#241A " , " 16#2052/1F " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 1 " , " 4 " , " 0 ... 10 " , " [Ramp divider] (dCF) " ,, " 120 "
" DCI " , " DC injection via logic input " , " 16#23FF " , " 16#2052/4 " , " PSLIN " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [DC injection assign.] (dCI) " ,, " 121 "
" IDC " , " Level of DC injection braking current activated via logic input or selected as stop mode " , " 16#2406 " , " 16#2052/B " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 A " , " Depends of rating " , " Refer to programming manual " , " [DC inject. level 1] (IdC) " ,, " 122 "
" TDC " , " Total DC injection braking time selected as normal stop mode " , " 16#2407 " , " 16#2052/C " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 s " , " 0.5 s " , " 0.1 s ... 30.0 s " , " [DC injection time 2] (tdC) " ,, " 123 "
" NST " , " Freewheel stop via logic input " , " 16#23FE " , " 16#2052/3 " , " PSLIN " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [Freewheel stop ass.] (nSt) " ,, " 124 "
" ADC " , " Automatic standstill DC injection " , " 16#23E4 " , " 16#204A/2 " , " ADC " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [Yes] (YES) " , " - " , " [Auto DC injection] (AdC) " ,, " 125 "
" TDC1 " , " Automatic standstill DC injection time " , " 16#23E5 " , " 16#204A/3 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 s " , " 0.5 s " , " 0.1 s ... 30.0 s " , " [Auto DC inj. time 1] (tdC1) " ,, " 126 "
" SDC1 " , " Level of automatic standstill DC injection current " , " 16#23E6 " , " 16#204A/4 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 A " , " Depends of rating " , " Refer to programming manual " , " [Auto DC inj. level 1] (SdC1) " ,, " 127 "
" TDC2 " , " 2nd automatic standstill DC injection time " , " 16#23E7 " , " 16#204A/5 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 s " , " 0.0 s " , " 0.0 s ... 30.0 s " , " [Auto DC inj. time 2] (tdC2) " ,, " 128 "
" SDC2 " , " 2nd level of standstill DC injection current " , " 16#23E8 " , " 16#204A/6 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 A " , " Depends of rating " , " Refer to programming manual " , " [Auto DC inj. level 2] (SdC2) " ,, " 129 "
" SA2 " , " Summing input 2 " , " 16#2448 " , " 16#2058/2 " , " PSA " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [AI2] (AI2) " , " - " , " [Summing ref. 2] (SA2) " ,, " 130 "
" SA3 " , " Summing input 3 " , " 16#2449 " , " 16#2058/3 " , " PSA " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [Summing ref. 3] (SA3) " ,, " 131 "
" PS2 " , " 2 preset speeds " , " 16#2421 " , " 16#2054/2 " , " PSLIN " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " Refer to programming manual " , " - " , " [2 preset speeds] (PS2) " ,, " 132 "
" PS4 " , " 4 preset speeds " , " 16#2422 " , " 16#2054/3 " , " PSLIN " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " Refer to programming manual " , " - " , " [4 preset speeds] (PS4) " ,, " 133 "
" PS8 " , " 8 preset speeds " , " 16#2423 " , " 16#2054/4 " , " PSLIN " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [8 preset speeds] (PS8) " ,, " 134 "
" PS16 " , " 16 preset speeds " , " 16#2424 " , " 16#2054/5 " , " PSLIN " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [16 preset speeds] (PS16) " ,, " 135 "
" SP2 " , " Preset speed 2 " , " 16#242A " , " 16#2054/B " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " 10.0 Hz " , " 0.0 Hz ... 500.0 Hz " , " [Preset speed 2] (SP2) " ,, " 136 "
" SP3 " , " Preset speed 3 " , " 16#242B " , " 16#2054/C " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " 15.0 Hz " , " 0.0 Hz ... 500.0 Hz " , " [Preset speed 3] (SP3) " ,, " 137 "
" SP4 " , " Preset speed 4 " , " 16#242C " , " 16#2054/D " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " 20.0 Hz " , " 0.0 Hz ... 500.0 Hz " , " [Preset speed 4] (SP4) " ,, " 138 "
" SP5 " , " Preset speed 5 " , " 16#242D " , " 16#2054/E " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " 25.0 Hz " , " 0.0 Hz ... 500.0 Hz " , " [Preset speed 5] (SP5) " ,, " 139 "
" SP6 " , " Preset speed 6 " , " 16#242E " , " 16#2054/F " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " 30.0 Hz " , " 0.0 Hz ... 500.0 Hz " , " [Preset speed 6] (SP6) " ,, " 140 "
" SP7 " , " Preset speed 7 " , " 16#242F " , " 16#2054/10 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " 35.0 Hz " , " 0.0 Hz ... 500.0 Hz " , " [Preset speed 7] (SP7) " ,, " 141 "
" SP8 " , " Preset speed 8 " , " 16#2430 " , " 16#2054/11 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " 40.0 Hz " , " 0.0 Hz ... 500.0 Hz " , " [Preset speed 8] (SP8) " ,, " 142 "
" SP9 " , " Preset speed 9 " , " 16#2431 " , " 16#2054/12 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " 45.0 Hz " , " 0.0 Hz ... 500.0 Hz " , " [Preset speed 9] (SP9) " ,, " 143 "
" SP10 " , " Preset speed 10 " , " 16#2432 " , " 16#2054/13 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " 50.0 Hz " , " 0.0 Hz ... 500.0 Hz " , " [Preset speed 10] (SP10) " ,, " 144 "
" SP11 " , " Preset speed 11 " , " 16#2433 " , " 16#2054/14 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " 55.0 Hz " , " 0.0 Hz ... 500.0 Hz " , " [Preset speed 11] (SP11) " ,, " 145 "
" SP12 " , " Preset speed 12 " , " 16#2434 " , " 16#2054/15 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " 60.0 Hz " , " 0.0 Hz ... 500.0 Hz " , " [Preset speed 12] (SP12) " ,, " 146 "
" SP13 " , " Preset speed 13 " , " 16#2435 " , " 16#2054/16 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " 70.0 Hz " , " 0.0 Hz ... 500.0 Hz " , " [Preset speed 13] (SP13) " ,, " 147 "
" SP14 " , " Preset speed 14 " , " 16#2436 " , " 16#2054/17 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " 80.0 Hz " , " 0.0 Hz ... 500.0 Hz " , " [Preset speed 14] (SP14) " ,, " 148 "
" SP15 " , " Preset speed 15 " , " 16#2437 " , " 16#2054/18 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " 90.0 Hz " , " 0.0 Hz ... 500.0 Hz " , " [Preset speed 15] (SP15) " ,, " 149 "
" SP16 " , " Preset speed 16 " , " 16#2438 " , " 16#2054/19 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " 100.0 Hz " , " 0.0 Hz ... 500.0 Hz " , " [Preset speed 16] (SP16) " ,, " 150 "
" JOG " , " Jog operation " , " 16#23F9 " , " 16#2051/B " , " PSLIN " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " Refer to programming manual " , " - " , " [JOG] (JOG) " ,, " 151 "
" JGF " , " Jog operation reference " , " 16#23FA " , " 16#2051/C " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " 10.0 Hz " , " 0.0 Hz ... 10.0 Hz " , " [Jog frequency] (JGF) " ,, " 152 "
" USP " , " + speed (motorized potentiometer) " , " 16#243B " , " 16#2055/2 " , " PSLIN " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [+ speed assignment] (USP) " ,, " 153 "
" DSP " , " -speed (motorized potentiometer) " , " 16#243C " , " 16#2055/3 " , " PSLIN " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [-Speed assignment] (dSP) " ,, " 154 "
" STR " , " Save reference " , " 16#243D " , " 16#2055/4 " , " STR " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [Reference saved] (Str) " ,, " 155 "
" PIF " , " PI regulator feedback " , " 16#244C " , " 16#2059/2 " , " PSA " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [PID feedback ass.] (PIF) " ,, " 156 "
" RPG " , " PI regulator proportional gain " , " 16#2474 " , " 16#2059/2A " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.01 " , " 1.00 " , " 0.01 ... 100.00 " , " [PID prop. gain] (rPG) " ,, " 157 "
" RIG " , " PI regulator integral gain " , " 16#2475 " , " 16#2059/2B " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.01 " , " 1.00 " , " 0.01 ... 100.00 " , " [PID integral gain] (rIG) " ,, " 158 "
" FBS " , " PI feedback multiplication coefficient " , " 16#244E " , " 16#2059/4 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 " , " 1.0 " , " 0.1 ... 100.00 " , " [PID fbk scale factor] (FbS) " ,, " 159 "
" PIC " , " Reversal of the direction of correction of the PI regulator " , " 16#2473 " , " 16#2059/29 " , " N_Y " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [PID correct. reverse] (PIC) " ,, " 160 "
" PR2 " , " 2 preset PI references " , " 16#2454 " , " 16#2059/A " , " PSLIN " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [2 preset PID ref.] (Pr2) " ,, " 161 "
" PR4 " , " 4 preset PI references " , " 16#2455 " , " 16#2059/B " , " PSLIN " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [4 preset PID ref.] (Pr4) " ,, " 162 "
" RP2 " , " 2nd preset PI reference " , " 16#2460 " , " 16#2059/16 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 % " , " 30.0 % " , " 0 ... 100 % " , " [Preset ref. PID 2] (rP2) " ,, " 163 "
" RP3 " , " 3rd preset PI reference " , " 16#2461 " , " 16#2059/17 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 % " , " 60.0 % " , " 0 ... 100 % " , " [Preset ref. PID 3] (rP3) " ,, " 164 "
" RP4 " , " 4th preset PI reference " , " 16#2462 " , " 16#2059/18 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 % " , " 90.0 % " , " 0 ... 100 % " , " [Preset ref. PID 4] (rP4) " ,, " 165 "
" RSL " , " Restart error threshold ( " " wake-up " " threshold) " , " 16#2487 " , " 16#2059/3D " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 " , " 0.0 " , " 0.0 ... 100.0 " , " [PID wake up thresh.] (rSL) " ,, " 166 "
" PII " , " Internal PI reference enabled " , " 16#2453 " , " 16#2059/9 " , " N_Y " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [Act. internal PID ref.] (PII) " ,, " 167 "
" RPI " , " Internal PI reference " , " 16#245F " , " 16#2059/15 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 % " , " 0.0 " , " 0.0 ... 100.0 % " , " [Internal PID ref.] (rPI) " ,, " 168 "
" BLC " , " Brake control configuration " , " 16#23DB " , " 16#2046/2 " , " BLC " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [Brake assignment] (bLC) " ,, " 169 "
" BRL " , " Brake release frequency " , " 16#23DC " , " 16#2046/3 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " Depends of rating " , " 0.0 ... 10.0 Hz " , " [Brake release freq] (brL) " ,, " 170 "
" IBR " , " Motor current threshold for brake release " , " 16#23E0 " , " 16#2046/7 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 A " , " Depends of rating " , " Refer to programming manual " , " [Brake release I FW] (Ibr) " ,, " 171 "
" BRT " , " Brake release time " , " 16#23DE " , " 16#2046/5 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.01 s " , " 0.50 s " , " 0.00 s ... 5.00 s " , " [Brake Release time] (brt) " ,, " 172 "
" BEN " , " Brake engage frequency threshold " , " 16#23DD " , " 16#2046/4 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " INT (Signed16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " 65535 " , " 0.0 ... (LSP) Hz " , " [Brake engage freq] (bEn) " ,, " 173 "
" BET " , " Brake engage time " , " 16#23DF " , " 16#2046/6 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.01 s " , " 0.50 s " , " 0.00 s ... 5.00 s " , " [Brake engage time] (bEt) " ,, " 174 "
" BIP " , " Brake release pulse " , " 16#23E1 " , " 16#2046/8 " , " BIP " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [Brake impulse] (bIP) " ,, " 175 "
" LC2 " , " Switching for second current limit " , " 16#238F " , " 16#203E/3 " , " PSLIN " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [Current limit 2] (LC2) " ,, " 176 "
" CL2 " , " 2nd current limit " , " 16#2390 " , " 16#203E/4 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 A " , " Depends of rating " , " Refer to programming manual " , " [I Limit. 2 value] (CL2) " ,, " 177 "
" CHP " , " Switching, motor 2 " , " 16#2302 " , " 16#2032/C " , " PSLIN " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [Motor switching] (CHP) " ,, " 178 "
" UNS2 " , " Nominal motor voltage (motor 2) given on the rating plate " , " 16#23C0 " , " 16#2043/2 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 1 V " , " Depends of rating " , " Depends of rating " , " [Nom. mot. 2 volt.] (UnS2) " ,, " 179 "
" FRS2 " , " Nominal motor frequency (motor 2) given on the rating plate " , " 16#23C1 " , " 16#2043/3 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " Refer to programming manual " , " 10.0 Hz ... 500.0 Hz " , " [Nom. motor 2 freq.] (FrS2) " ,, " 180 "
" NCR2 " , " Nominal motor current (motor 2) given on the rating plate " , " 16#23C2 " , " 16#2043/4 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 A " , " Depends of rating " , " Refer to programming manual " , " [Nom. mot. 2 current] (nCr2) " ,, " 181 "
" NSP2 " , " Nominal motor speed (motor 2) given on the rating plate " , " 16#23C3 " , " 16#2043/5 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 1 rpm " , " Depends of rating " , " 0 ... 32767 rpm " , " [Nom. mot. 2 speed] (nSP2) " ,, " 182 "
" COS2 " , " Motor Cos Phi (motor 2) given on the rating plate " , " 16#23C5 " , " 16#2043/7 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.01 " , " Depends of rating " , " 50 ... 100 " , " [Motor 1 Cosinus Phi] (COS) " ,, " 183 "
" UFT2 " , " Selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio for motor 2 " , " 16#23C6 " , " 16#2043/8 " , " UFT " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [SVC] (n) " , " - " , " [U/F mot.2 selected] (UFt2) " ,, " 184 "
" UFR2 " , " IR compensation/Voltage boost, motor 2 " , " 16#23D6 " , " 16#2043/18 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 1 % " , " 20 % " , " 0 % ... 100 % " , " [IR compensation 2] (UFr2) " ,, " 185 "
" FLG2 " , " Frequency loop gain, motor 2 " , " 16#23D3 " , " 16#2043/15 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 1 % " , " 20 % " , " 1 % ... 100 % " , " [FreqLoopGain 2] (FLG2) " ,, " 186 "
" STA2 " , " Frequency loop stability, motor 2 " , " 16#23D4 " , " 16#2043/16 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 1 % " , " 20 % " , " 1 % ... 100 % " , " [Freq. loop stability 2] (StA2) " ,, " 187 "
" SLP2 " , " Slip compensation, motor 2 " , " 16#23D8 " , " 16#2043/1A " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 1 % " , " 100 % " , " 0 % ... 150 % " , " [Slip compensation 2] (SLP2) " ,, " 188 "
" LAF " , " Forward limit switch " , " 16#2440 " , " 16#2056/2 " , " PSLIN " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [Stop FW limit sw.] (LAF) " ,, " 189 "
" LAR " , " Reverse limit switch " , " 16#2441 " , " 16#2056/3 " , " PSLIN " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [Stop RV limit sw.] (LAr) " ,, " 190 "
" LAS " , " Type of limit switch stop " , " 16#2442 " , " 16#2056/4 " , " STT " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [Freewheel] (nSt) " , " - " , " [Stop type] (LAS) " ,, " 191 "
" ATR " , " Automatic restart " , " 16#22DB " , " 16#2029/17 " , " N_Y " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [Automatic restart] (Atr) " ,, " 192 "
" TAR " , " Max. duration of restart process " , " 16#22DC " , " 16#2029/18 " , " DUR " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [5 minutes] (5) " , " - " , " [Max. restart time] (tAr) " ,, " 193 "
" RSF " , " Clearing the current detected fault " , " 16#22DD " , " 16#2029/19 " , " PSLIN " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [Fault reset] (rSF) " ,, " 194 "
" FLR " , " Flying restart (automatic catching a spinning load on ramp) " , " 16#2141 " , " 16#2001/B " , " N_Y " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [Catch on the fly] (FLr) " ,, " 195 "
" ETF " , " External fault " , " 16#22E4 " , " 16#2029/20 " , " PSLIN " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [External fault ass.] (EtF) " ,, " 196 "
" LET " , " Configuration of external fault detection " , " 16#22C3 " , " 16#2028/5B " , " L_H " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [Active high] (HIG) " , " - " , " [External fault config] (LEt) " ,, " 197 "
" EPL " , " Stop mode in the event of an external fault EPF " , " 16#226F " , " 16#2028/7 " , " ECFG " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [Freewheel] (YES) " , " - " , " [External fault mgt] (EPL) " ,, " 198 "
" OPL " , " Configuration of motor phase loss detection " , " 16#239D " , " 16#2042/C " , " OPL " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [Yes] (YES) " , " - " , " [Output Phase Loss] (OPL) " ,, " 199 "
" IPL " , " Configuration of line phase loss detection " , " 16#226B " , " 16#2028/3 " , " ECFG " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " Depends of rating " , " - " , " [Input phase loss] (IPL) " ,, " 200 "
" OHL " , " Stop mode in the event of the drive overheating OHF " , " 16#2271 " , " 16#2028/9 " , " ECFG " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [Freewheel] (YES) " , " - " , " [Overtemp fault mgt] (OHL) " ,, " 201 "
" OLL " , " Stop mode in the event of a motor overload OLF " , " 16#2272 " , " 16#2028/A " , " ECFG " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [Freewheel] (YES) " , " - " , " [Overload fault mgt] (OLL) " ,, " 202 "
" SLL " , " Stop mode in the event of a Modbus serial link interuption SLF " , " 16#2273 " , " 16#2028/B " , " ECFG " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [Freewheel] (YES) " , " - " , " [Modbus fault mgt] (SLL) " ,, " 203 "
" COL " , " Stop mode in the event of a CANopen serial link interuption COF " , " 16#2274 " , " 16#2028/C " , " ECFG " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [Freewheel] (YES) " , " - " , " [CANopen fault mgt] (COL) " ,, " 204 "
" TNL " , " Configuration of auto-tuning status tnF " , " 16#2275 " , " 16#2028/D " , " ECFG " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [Freewheel] (YES) " , " - " , " [Autotune fault mgt] (tnL) " ,, " 205 "
" LFL " , " Stop mode in the event of a loss of 4 - 20 mA signal (LFF) " , " 16#226C " , " 16#2028/4 " , " ECFG " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [Ignore] (nO) " , " - " , " [AI2 4-20mA loss] (LFL2) " ,, " 206 "
" LFF " , " Fallback speed " , " 16#22B9 " , " 16#2028/51 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 Hz " , " 10.0 Hz " , " 0.0 Hz ... 500.0 Hz " , " [Fallback speed] (LFF) " ,, " 207 "
" DRN " , " Derated operation in the event of an overvoltage " , " 16#2270 " , " 16#2028/8 " , " N_Y " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [Derated operation] (DRN) " ,, " 208 "
" STP " , " Controlled stop on mains power break " , " 16#226D " , " 16#2028/5 " , " STP " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [UnderV. prevention] (StP) " ,, " 209 "
" INH " , " Fault detection inhibition assignment " , " 16#22DE " , " 16#2029/1A " , " PSLIN " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [Fault inhibit assign.] (InH) " ,, " 210 "
" RPR " , " Operating time reset to zero " , " 16#214B " , " 16#2001/15 " , " RPR " , " Control parameters " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [Operating t. reset] (rPr) " ,, " 211 "
" ADD " , " Modbus: Drive address " , " 16#2230 " , " 16#201E/2 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 1 " , " [OFF] (OFF) " , " [OFF] (OFF) ... 247 " , " [Modbus Address] (Add) " ,, " 212 "
" TBR " , " Modbus: Transmission speed " , " 16#2232 " , " 16#201E/4 " , " TBR " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [19.2 Kbps] (19 2) " , " - " , " [Modbus baud rate] (tbr) " ,, " 213 "
" TFO " , " Modbus: communication format " , " 16#2233 " , " 16#201E/5 " , " FOR " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [8-E-1] (8E1) " , " - " , " [Modbus format] (tFO) " ,, " 214 "
" TTO " , " Modbus: Time-out " , " 16#2234 " , " 16#201E/6 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 0.1 s " , " 10.0 s " , " 0.1 s ... 10.0 s " , " [Modbus time out] (ttO) " ,, " 215 "
" ADCO " , " CANopen: Drive address " , " 16#2262 " , " 16#201E/34 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 1 " , " [OFF] (OFF) " , " [OFF] (OFF) ... 127 " , " [CANopen address] (AdCO) " ,, " 216 "
" BDCO " , " CANopen: Transmission speed " , " 16#2264 " , " 16#201E/36 " , " BDCO " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [125 kbps] (125 ) " , " - " , " [CANopen bit rate] (bdCO) " ,, " 217 "
" FLO " , " Forced local mode " , " 16#2323 " , " 16#2036/20 " , " PSLIN " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [Forced local assign.] (FLO) " ,, " 218 "
" FLOC " , " Selection of the reference and control channel in forced local mode " , " 16#2324 " , " 16#2036/21 " , " PSA " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [Forced local Ref.] (FLOC) " ,, " 219 "
" COD " , " Display terminal locking code " , " 16#2104 " , " 16#2000/4 " , " - " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " - " , " Refer to programming manual " , " - " , " [PIN code 1] (COd) " ,, " 220 "
" RP " , " Reset all the detected faults " , " 16#22E1 " , " 16#2029/1D " , " N_Y " , " Configuration and settings " , " R/WS " , " WORD (Enumeration) " , " - " , " [No] (nO) " , " - " , " [Product reset] (rP) " ,, " 221 "
" SMIL " , " Velocity min amount " , " 16#2499 " , " 16#6046/01 " , " - " , " CiA 402 settings " , " R/W " , " UDINT " , " 1 rpm " , " " , " 0 rpm ... (HSP) " ,,, " 222 "
" SMAL " , " Velocity max amount " , " 16#249A " , " 16#6046/02 " , " - " , " CiA 402 settings " , " R/W " , " UDINT " , " 1 rpm " , " " , " (LSP) ... (tFr) " ,,, " 223 "
" SPAL " , " Acceleration delta speed " , " 16#249C " , " 16#6048/01 " , " - " , " CiA 402 settings " , " R/W " , " UDINT " , " 1 rpm " , " " , " 1 rpm ... 65535 rpm " ,,, " 224 "
" SPAT " , " Acceleration delta time " , " 16#249D " , " 16#6048/02 " , " - " , " CiA 402 settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 1 s " , " " , " 0 s ... 65535 s " ,,, " 225 "
" SPDL " , " Deceleration delta speed " , " 16#249F " , " 16#6049/01 " , " - " , " CiA 402 settings " , " R/W " , " UDINT " , " 1 rpm " , " " , " 1 rpm ... 65535 rpm " ,,, " 226 "
" SPDT " , " Deceleration delta time " , " 16#24A0 " , " 16#6049/02 " , " - " , " CiA 402 settings " , " R/W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " , " 1 s " ,, " 0 s ... 65535 s " ,,, " 227 "
,,,,,,,,,,,,,
" Code " ,,,,,,,,,,,,,
" ACPi_ModuleID " , " ACOPOSinverter Module ID " , " 16#1004 " , " - " , " - " ,, " R " , " UDINT " ,,,,,,
" ACPi_SerialNumber " , " ACOPOSinverter Serial Number " , " 16#100C " , " - " , " - " ,, " R " , " UDINT " ,,,,,,
" DigitalOutputPacked " , " Digital Output " , " 16#01 " , " - " , " DO " ,, " W " , " USINT (Unsigned8) " ,,,,,,
" StatusDigitalOutputPacked " , " Status Digital Output " , " 16#25 " , " - " , " DO_Status " ,, " R " , " USINT (Unsigned8) " ,,,,,,
" Control01 " , " Cyclic control word for the counter inputs (Counter01 could be either defined as eventcounter or as AB counter) " , " 16#06 " , " - " , " CONTROL01 " ,, " W " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " ,,,,,,
" Status01 " , " Cyclic status word for the counter inputs " , " 16#22 " , " - " , " STATUS01 " ,, " R " , " UINT (Unsigned16) " ,,,,,,
" CounterConfig01 " , " Counter configuration 01(If the external counting frequency (LI3) is used, Counter02 can't be used) " , " 16#31 " , " - " , " CONFIG01 " ,, " W " , " USINT (Unsigned8) " ,,,,,,
" CounterConfig02 " , " Counter configuration 02 " , " 16#33 " , " - " , " CONFIG02 " ,, " W " , " USINT (Unsigned8) " ,,,,,,
" OutputConfiguration01 " , " Output configuration 01 " , " 16#35 " , " - " , " OUTPUT01 " ,, " W " , " USINT (Unsigned8) " ,,,,,,
" Counter01 " , " Counter Value 01: Event counter/ gate measurement/ period measurement/ AB counter " , " 16#0C " , " - " , " COUNTER " ,, " R " , " UDINT/DINT " ,,,,,,
" Counter02 " , " Counter Value 02: Event counter/ gate measurement/ period measurement/ AB counter " , " 16#14 " , " - " , " COUNTER " ,, " R " , " UDINT " ,,,,,,
" SDC_SetTime " , " SDC Set Time (Only available if SDC mode in IO Configuration is switched on) " , " 16#902 " , " - " ,,, " W " , " INT (Signed16) " ,,,,,,
" SDC_LifeCnt " , " SDC Life Counter (Only available if SDC mode in IO Configuration is switched on) " , " 16#1011 " , " - " ,,, " R " , " SINT " ,,,,,,
" Code " , " Values " , " Display " , " Description "
" ACT " , " 0 " , " [Not done] (tAb) " ,
, " 1 " , " [Pending] (PEnd) " ,
, " 2 " , " [In Progress] (PrOG) " ,
, " 3 " , " [Failed] (FAIL) " ,
, " 4 " , " [Done] (dOnE) " ,
, " 5 " , " [Entered R1] (Strd) " ,
" UFT " , " 0 " , " L: Constant torque for motors connected in parallel or special motors " ,
, " 1 " , " P: Variable torque for pump and fan applications " ,
, " 2 " , " n: Sensorless flux vector control for constant torque applications " ,
, " 3 " , " nLd " " : Energy saving, for variable torque applications not requiring high dynamics (behaves in a similar way to the P ratio at no load and the n ratio on load). " ,
" DO " , " 0 " , " nO: Not assigned " ,
, " 1 " , " FLt: Drive detected fault " , " Note: With these assignments,
configure AO1t = 0A "
, " 2 " , " rUn: Drive running " ,
, " 4 " , " FtA: Frequency threshold reached " ,
, " 5 " , " FLA: High speed (HSP) reached " ,
, " 6 " , " CtA: Current threshold reached " ,
, " 7 " , " SrA: Frequency reference reached " ,
, " 8 " , " tSA: Motor thermal threshold reached " ,
, " 9 " , " bLC: Brake sequence " ,
, " 12 " , " APL: Loss of 4-20 mA signal " ,
, " 129 " , " OCr: Motor current. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to twice the nominal drive current " ,
, " 130 " , " OFr: Motor frequency. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to the maximum frequency tFr " ,
, " 132 " , " Otr: Motor torque. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to twice the nominal motor torque " ,
, " 139 " , " OPr: Power supplied by the drive. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to twice the nominal drive power " ,
" ADC " , " 0 " , " [No] (nO) " ,
, " 1 " , " [Yes] (YES) " ,
, " 2 " , " [Continuous] (Ct) " ,
" AO1T " , " 1 " , " [Voltage] (10U) " ,
, " 2 " , " [Current] (0A) " ,
, " 3 " , " [Cur. 4-20] (4A) " ,
" BDCO " , " 30 " , " [10 kbps] (10.0) " ,
, " 34 " , " [20 kbps] (20.0) " ,
, " 38 " , " [50 kbps] (50.0) " ,
, " 52 " , " [125 kbps] (125.0) " ,
, " 60 " , " [250 kbps] (250.0) " ,
, " 68 " , " [500 kbps] (500.0) " ,
, " 76 " , " [1 Mbps] (1000) " ,
" BFR " , " 0 " , " [50Hz IEC] (50) " ,
, " 1 " , " [60Hz NEMA] (60) " ,
" BIP " , " 0 " , " [No] (nO) " ,
, " 1 " , " [Yes] (YES) " ,
" BLC " , " 0 " , " [No] (nO) " ,
, " 2 " , " [R2] (r2) " ,
, " 64 " , " [DO1] (dO1) " ,
" BRA " , " 0 " , " [No] (nO) " ,
, " 1 " , " [Yes] (YES) " ,
" CDX " , " 1 " , " [Terminals] (tEr) " ,
, " 2 " , " [Local] (LOC) " ,
, " 3 " , " [HMI] (LCC) " ,
, " 10 " , " [Modbus] (Mdb) " ,
, " 20 " , " [CANopen] (CAn) " ,
" CFG " , " 0 " , " StS: Run/stop configuration " ,
, " 1 " , " Std: Factory configuration " ,
" CHCF " , " 1 " , " [Not separ.] (SIM) " ,
, " 2 " , " [Separate] (SEP) " ,
" COP " , " 0 " , " [No] (nO) " ,
, " 1 " , " [Reference] (SP) " ,
, " 2 " , " [Command] (Cd) " ,
, " 3 " , " [Cmd + ref.] (ALL) " ,
" DUR " , " 0 " , " [5 minutes] (5) " ,
, " 1 " , " [10 minutes] (10) " ,
, " 2 " , " [30 minutes] (30) " ,
, " 3 " , " [1 hour] (1H) " ,
, " 4 " , " [2 hours] (2H) " ,
, " 5 " , " [3 hours] (3H) " ,
, " 6 " , " [Unlimited] (Ct) " ,
" ECFG " , " 0 " , " [Ignore] (nO) " ,
, " 1 " , " [Freewheel] (YES) " ,
, " 6 " , " [Ramp stop] (rMP) " ,
, " 7 " , " [Fast stop] (FSt) " ,
" ERRD " , " 16#0000 " , " nOF: No fault code saved " ,
, " 16#1000 " , " CrF: Capacitor pre-charge detected fault or " ,
, " 16#1000 " , " OLF: Motor overload or " ,
, " 16#1000 " , " SOF: Motor overspeed " ,
, " 16#2310 " , " OCF: Overcurrent " ,
, " 16#2320 " , " OCF: Impeding short-circuit or " ,
, " 16#2320 " , " OCF: Power module, specific to 15kW drives " ,
, " 16#2330 " , " SCF: Motor short-circuit (to ground) " ,
, " 16#2340 " , " OCF: Motor short-circuit (phase to phase) " ,
, " 16#3110 " , " OSF: Line supply overvoltage " ,
, " 16#3120 " , " USF: Line supply undervoltage " ,
, " 16#3130 " , " PHF: Line supply phase loss " ,
, " 16#3310 " , " ObF: DC bus overvoltage or " ,
, " 16#3310 " , " OPF: Motor phase loss or " ,
, " 16#3310 " , " OPF: Motor phase loss - 3 phases " ,
, " 16#4210 " , " OHF: Drive overheating " ,
, " 16#5520 " , " EEF: EEPROM memory " ,
, " 16#6100 " , " InF: Internal " ,
, " 16#6300 " , " CFF: Incorrect configuration (parameters) or " ,
, " 16#6300 " , " CFI: Invalid configuration (parameters) " ,
, " 16#7300 " , " LFF: 4 - 20 mA loss " ,
, " 16#7510 " , " SLF: Modbus communication interruption " ,
, " 16#8100 " , " COF: Communication interruption, line 2 (CANopen) " ,
, " 16#9000 " , " EPF: External fault " ,
, " 16#FF00 " , " tnF: Auto-tuning was unsuccessful " ,
, " 16#FF01 " , " bLF: Brake control " ,
, " 16#7520 " , " ILF: Optional internal link " ,
, " 16#7510 " , " CNF: Communication interruption on the communication card " ,
" FCS " , " 0 " , " (nO) " ,
, " 2 " , " (rEC1) " ,
, " 64 " , " (InI) " ,
" FOR " , " 2 " , " [8-O-1] (8o1) " ,
, " 3 " , " [8-E-1] (8E1) " ,
, " 4 " , " [8-N-1] (8n1) " ,
, " 5 " , " [8-N-2] (8n2) " ,
" INR " , " 0 " , " [0.01] (0.01) " ,
, " 1 " , " [0.1] (0.1) " ,
, " 2 " , " [1] (1) " ,
" L_H " , " 0 " , " [Active low] (LO) " ,
, " 1 " , " [Active high] (HIG) " ,
" LFT " , " 0 " , " " " nOF " " : No fault code saved " ,
, " 3 " , " " " CFF " " : Incorrect configuration (parameters) " ,
, " 4 " , " " " CFI " " : Invalid configuration (parameters) " ,
, " 5 " , " " " SLF " " : Modbus communication interuption " ,
, " 6 " , " " " ILF " " : Internal communcation interuption " ,
, " 7 " , " " " CnF " " : Communication option card " ,
, " 8 " , " " " EPF " " : External fault " ,
, " 9 " , " " " OCF " " : Overcurrent " ,
, " 10 " , " " " CrF " " : Capacitor pre-charge " ,
, " 13 " , " " " LFF " " : 4 - 20 mA loss " ,
, " 16 " , " " " OHF " " : Drive overheating " ,
, " 17 " , " " " OLF " " : Motor overload " ,
, " 18 " , " " " ObF " " : DC bus overvoltage " ,
, " 19 " , " " " OSF " " : Line supply overvoltage " ,
, " 20 " , " " " OPF " " : Motor phase loss " ,
, " 21 " , " " " PHF " " : Line phase loss " ,
, " 22 " , " " " USF " " : Line supply undervoltage " ,
, " 23 " , " " " OCF " " : Motor short-circuit (phase to phase) " ,
, " 24 " , " " " SOF " " : Motor overspeed " ,
, " 25 " , " " " tnF " " : Auto-tuning was unsuccessful " ,
, " 26 " , " " " IF1 " " : Unknown rating " ,
, " 27 " , " " " IF2 " " : MMI card " ,
, " 28 " , " " " IF3 " " : MMI communication " ,
, " 29 " , " " " IF4 " " : Industrial EEPROM " ,
, " 30 " , " " " EEF " " : EEPROM memory " ,
, " 31 " , " " " OCF " " : Impeding short-circuit " ,
, " 32 " , " " " SCF " " : Motor short-circuit (to ground) " ,
, " 33 " , " " " OPF " " : Motor phase loss - 3 phases " ,
, " 34 " , " " " COF " " : Communication interuption, fault line 2 (CANopen) " ,
, " 35 " , " " " bLF " " : Brake control " ,
, " 36 " , " " " OCF " " : Power module, specific to 15kW drives " ,
, " 55 " , " " " SCF " " : Power module or motor short-circuit, detected at power up. " ,
" ERCO " , " 0 " , " " " No error " " " ,
, " 1 " , " " " Bus off error " " " ,
, " 2 " , " " " Life time error " " " ,
, " 3 " , " " " Net overrun " " " ,
, " 4 " , " " " Heartbeat error " " " ,
" N_Y " , " 0 " , " [No] (nO) " ,
, " 1 " , " [Yes] (YES) " ,
" NCV " , " 0 " , " unknown " ,
, " 1 " , " 0.18 KW " ,
, " 2 " , " 0.37 KW " ,
, " 3 " , " 0.55 KW " ,
, " 4 " , " 0.75 KW " ,
, " 5 " , " 1.1 KW " ,
, " 6 " , " 1.5 KW " ,
, " 7 " , " 2.2 KW " ,
, " 8 " , " 3 KW " ,
, " 9 " , " 4 KW " ,
, " 10 " , " 5.5 KW " ,
, " 11 " , " 7.5 KW " ,
, " 12 " , " 11 KW " ,
, " 13 " , " 15 KW " ,
" OPL " , " 0 " , " [No] (nO) " ,
, " 1 " , " [Yes] (YES) " ,
, " 2 " , " [Output cut] (OAC) " ,
" PSA " , " 0 " , " [No] (nO) " ,
, " 1 " , " [AI1] (AI1) " ,
, " 2 " , " [AI2] (AI2) " ,
, " 3 " , " [AI3] (AI3) " ,
, " 16 " , " [Network AI] (AIV1) " ,
, " 160 " , " [+/-Speed] (UPdt) " ,
, " 161 " , " [+/-spd HMI] (UPdH) " ,
, " 163 " , " [HMI] (LCC) " ,
, " 164 " , " [Modbus] (Mdb) " ,
, " 167 " , " [CANopen] (CAn) " ,
" PSL " , " 0 " , " [No] (nO) " ,
, " 1 " , " [No drive flt] (FLt) " ,
, " 2 " , " [Drv running] (rUn) " ,
, " 4 " , " [Freq.Th.att.] (FtA) " ,
, " 5 " , " [HSP attain.] (FLA) " ,
, " 6 " , " [I attained] (CtA) " ,
, " 7 " , " [Freq.ref.att] (SrA) " ,
, " 8 " , " [Th.mot. att.] (tSA) " ,
, " 9 " , " [Brk control] (bLC) " ,
, " 12 " , " [AI2 Al. 4-20] (AP2) " ,
, " 129 " , " [LI1] (LI1) " ,
, " 130 " , " [LI2] (LI2) " ,
, " 131 " , " [LI3] (LI3) " ,
, " 132 " , " [LI4] (LI4) " ,
, " 133 " , " [LI5] (LI5) " ,
, " 134 " , " [LI6] (LI6) " ,
" PSLIN " , " 0 " , " [No] (nO) " ,
, " 96 " , " [ch1 active] (Fr1) " ,
, " 97 " , " [ch2 active] (Fr2) " ,
, " 98 " , " [ch1 active] (Cd1) " ,
, " 99 " , " [ch2 active] (Cd2) " ,
, " 128 " , " [Yes] (YES) " ,
, " 129 " , " [LI1] (LI1) " ,
, " 130 " , " [LI2] (LI2) " ,
, " 131 " , " [LI3] (LI3) " ,
, " 132 " , " [LI4] (LI4) " ,
, " 133 " , " [LI5] (LI5) " ,
, " 134 " , " [LI6] (LI6) " ,
, " 171 " , " [CD11] (Cd11) " ,
, " 172 " , " [CD12] (Cd12) " ,
, " 173 " , " [CD13] (Cd13) " ,
, " 174 " , " [CD14] (Cd14) " ,
, " 175 " , " [CD15] (Cd15) " ,
, " 187 " , " [C111] (C111) " ,
, " 188 " , " [C112] (C112) " ,
, " 189 " , " [C113] (C113) " ,
, " 190 " , " [C114] (C114) " ,
, " 191 " , " [C115] (C115) " ,
, " 203 " , " [C211] (C211) " ,
, " 204 " , " [C212] (C212) " ,
, " 205 " , " [C213] (C213) " ,
, " 206 " , " [C214] (C214) " ,
, " 207 " , " [C215] (C215) " ,
" RPR " , " 0 " , " [No] (nO) " ,
, " 2 " , " [rst. runtime] (rtH) " ,
" RPT " , " 0 " , " [Linear] (LIn) " ,
, " 1 " , " [S ramp] (S) " ,
, " 2 " , " [U ramp] (U) " ,
, " 3 " , " [Customized] (CUS) " ,
" SCS " , " 0 " , " [No] (nO) " ,
, " 2 " , " [Config 1] (Str1) " ,
" STP " , " 0 " , " [No] (nO) " ,
, " 1 " , " [DC Maintain] (MMS) " ,
, " 2 " , " [Ramp stop] (rMP) " ,
, " 3 " , " [Fast stop] (FSt) " ,
" STR " , " 0 " , " [No] (nO) " ,
, " 1 " , " [RAM] (rAM) " ,
, " 2 " , " [EEprom] (EEP) " ,
" STT " , " 0 " , " [Ramp stop] (rMP) " ,
, " 1 " , " [Fast stop] (FSt) " ,
, " 2 " , " [Freewheel] (nSt) " ,
, " 3 " , " [DC injection] (dCI) " ,
" TBR " , " 24 " , " [4.8 Kbps] (4 8) " ,
, " 28 " , " [9.6 Kbps] (9 6) " ,
, " 32 " , " [19.2 Kbps] (19 2) " ,
" TCC " , " 0 " , " [2 wire] (2C) " ,
, " 1 " , " [3 wire] (3C) " ,
, " 2 " , " [Local] (LOC) " ,
" TCT " , " 0 " , " [Level] (LEL) " ,
, " 1 " , " [Transition] (trn) " ,
, " 2 " , " [Fwd priority] (PFO) " ,
" TUN " , " 0 " , " nO: Auto-tuning not performed " ,
, " 112 " , " YES: Auto-tuning is performed as soon as possible " ,
, " 113 " , " dOnE: Use of the values given the last time auto-tuning was performed " ,
, " 114 " , " rUn: Auto-tuning is performed every time a run command is sent " ,
, " 115 " , " POn: Auto-tuning is performed on every power-up " ,
, " 116 " , " LI1: Logic input LI1 " ,
, " 117 " , " LI2: Logic input LI2 " ,
, " 118 " , " LI3: Logic input LI3 " ,
, " 119 " , " LI4: Logic input LI4 " ,
, " 120 " , " LI5: Logic input LI5 " ,
, " 121 " , " LI6: Logic input LI6 " ,
" VCAL " , " 0 " , " unknown " ,
, " 1 " , " 200...240 V single phase " ,
, " 2 " , " 200...240 V 3-phase " ,
, " 3 " , " 380...500 V 3-phase " ,
, " 4 " , " 525...600 V 3-phase " ,
" ROT " , " 0 " , " DFR: Forward " ,
, " 1 " , " DRS: Reverse " ,
, " 2 " , " BOT: Both direction are authorized " ,
" UDP " ,, " Coded on 2 bytes. " ,
,, " - low order byte: firmware upgrade index (IE) in hexadecimal format " ,
,, " - high order byte: firmware version (V) in hexadecimal format " ,
,, " Example : For V1.2 IE04, UdP = 16#1204 " ,
" TDM " ,, " 100% = Nominal thermal state " ,
,, " 118% = " " OHF " " threshold (drive overheating) " ,
,, " Automatically reset to zero when the drive is powered down. " ,
" LCC " ,, " Parameter active only with the remote display terminal option and if LAC = L1 or L2. " ,
,, " 0 = " " nO " " : Function inactive " ,
,, " 1 = " " YES " " : Enables control of the drive using the STOP/RESET, RUN and FWD/REV buttons " ,
,, " on the display terminal. The speed reference is then given by parameter LFr page 19. Only the " ,
,, " freewheel, fast stop and DC injection stop commands remain active on the terminal block. If the " ,
,, " drive/terminal connection is cut or if the terminal has not been connected, the drive locks in an " ,
,, " SLF detected fault. " ,
" LAC " ,, " 0 = " " L1 " " : Access to standard functions. " ,
,, " 1 = " " L2 " " : Access to advanced functions. " ,
,, " 2 = L3: Access to advanced functions and management of mixed control modes. " ,
" Code " , " Description " ,
" CMD " ,, " bit 0: " " Switch on " " : active at 1 "
,, " bit 1: " " Disable Voltage " " : active at 0 "
,, " bit 2: " " Quick Stop " " : active at 0 "
,, " bit 3: " " Enable Operation " " : active at 1 "
,, " bits 4 to 6: Reserved: set to 0 "
,, " bit 7: Fault state reset: active on rising edge 0 - & gt; 1 "
,, " bits 8 to 10: Reserved: set to 0 "
,,
,, " For " " Access level " " LAC (page 35) = L1 or L2: "
,, " bit 11 = 0: Forward direction command "
,, " bit 11 = 1: Reverse direction command "
,, " bit 12 = 0: No action "
,, " bit 12 = 1: Stop command depending on the Stt " " Stop type " " parameter "
,, " bit 13 = 0: No action "
,, " bit 13 = 1: Injection stop command "
,, " bit 14 = 0: No action "
,, " bit 14 = 1: Fast stop command "
,, " bit 15: Reserved: set to 0 "
,,
,, " For " " Access level " " LAC (page 35) = L3: "
,, " Factory assignments "
,, " bit 11 = 0: Forward direction command "
,, " bit 11 = 1: Reverse direction command "
,, " bit 12 = 0: No action "
,, " bit 12 = 1: Stop command depending on the Stt " " Stop type " " parameter "
,, " bit 13: No action "
,, " bit 14: No action "
,, " bit 15: No action "
,,
,, " Bits 11 to 15 can be assigned to the following functions: "
,, " Ramp switching (rPS) "
,, " Fast stop (FSt) "
,, " DC injection (DCI) "
,, " 2 preset speeds (PS2) "
,, " 4 preset speeds (PS4) "
,, " 8 preset speeds (PS8) "
,, " 16 preset speeds (PS16) "
,, " 2 preset PI references (Pr2) "
,, " 4 preset PI references (Pr4) "
,, " Switching for 2nd current limit (LC2) "
,, " Switching, motor 2 (CHP) "
,, " External fault (EtF) "
,, " For example, to use bit 15 to switch the ramp, simply set the " " Ramp switching " " rPS "
,, " configuration parameter (page 39) to Cd15. "
,,
" CMI " ,, " bit 0 = 0: No action "
,, " bit 0 = 1: Recall factory settings command (1). This bit automatically resets to 0 when the request is taken into account. It is only active when the drive has come to a complete stop: ETI.4 = ETI.5 = 0. "
,, " bit 1 = 0: No action "
,, " bit 1 = 1: Save configuration/adjustments in EEPROM (2) if voltage is sufficient (no USF detected fault). This bit automatically resets to 0 when the request is taken into account. During saving (ETI.0 = 1), parameters cannot be written. "
,, " bit 2: Reserved "
,, " bit 3 = 0: No action "
,, " bit 3 = 1: External fault. The drive's behaviour during an external fault is defined by parameter EPL. "
,, " bit 4 = 0: No action "
,, " bit 4 = 1: Ramp switching command "
,, " bits 4 to 8: Reserved "
,, " bit 9 = 0: Normal resolution (references, output speed and output frequency in physical units: rpm and Hz) "
,, " bit 9 = 1: High resolution (references, output speed and output frequency in 32767 points for 600 Hz) "
,, " bits 10 to 12: Reserved "
,, " bit 13 = 0: Drive not locked on standstill "
,, " bit 13 = 1: Drive locked on standstill "
,, " bit 14 = 0: Control with Modbus communication monitoring "
,, " bit 14 = 1: Control with no Modbus communication monitoring (NTO) "
,, " bit 15 = 0: Parameter consistency check "
,, " bit 15 = 1: No parameter consistency check + drive locked on standstill (switching this bit to 0 will revalidate all parameters) "
,,
" ETA
EP0
EP1
EP2
EP3
EP4 " ,, " bit 0: Ready to switch on "
,, " bit 1: Switched on "
,, " bit 2: Operation enabled "
,, " bit 3 = 0: No detected fault "
,, " bit 3 = 1: Malfunction, detected fault (FAI) "
,, " bit 4: Voltage disabled (still equals 0) "
,, " bit 5: Quick stop "
,, " bit 6: Switch on disabled "
,, " bit 7 = 0: No alarm "
,, " bit 7 = 1: Alarm present "
,, " bit 8: Reserved "
,, " bit 9 = 0: Forced local mode in progress (FLO) "
,, " bit 9 = 1: No forced local mode "
,, " bit 10 = 0: Reference not reached (transient state) "
,, " bit 10 = 1: Reference reached (steady state) "
,, " bit 11 = 0: LFRD reference normal "
,, " bit 11 = 1: LFRD reference exceeded ( & lt; LSP or & gt; HSP) Note: LFRD is expressed in rpm, LSP and HSP in Hz "
,, " bits 12 and 13: Reserved "
,, " bit 14 = 0: No stop imposed by STOP key on built-in keypad or on the remote display terminal "
,, " bit 14 = 1: Stop imposed by STOP key on built-in keypad or on the remote display terminal "
,, " bit 15 = 0: Forward rotation (output frequency) "
,, " bit 15 = 1: Reverse rotation (output frequency) "
,,
" ETI " ,, " bit 0 = 0: Write parameters authorized "
,, " bit 0 = 1: Write parameters not authorized (the drive is in the process of saving the current parameters from the RAM to the EEPROM) "
,, " bit 1 = 0: No parameter consistency check + drive locked on standstill "
,, " bit 1 = 1: Parameter consistency check "
,, " bit 2 = 0: Fault state reset not authorized "
,, " bit 2 = 1: Fault state reset authorized "
,, " bit 3: Reserved "
,, " bit 4 = 0: Motor stopped "
,, " bit 4 = 1: Motor running "
,, " bit 5 = 0: No DC injection "
,, " bit 5 = 1: DC injection "
,, " bit 6 = 0: Drive in steady state "
,, " bit 6 = 1: Drive in transient state "
,, " bit 7 = 0: No motor thermal overload alarm "
,, " bit 7 = 1: Motor thermal overload alarm "
,, " bit 8 = 0: No alarm if excessive braking "
,, " bit 8 = 1: Alarm if excessive braking "
,, " bit 9 = 0: Drive not accelerating "
,, " bit 9 = 1: Drive accelerating "
,, " bit 10 = 0: Drive not decelerating "
,, " bit 10 = 1: Drive decelerating "
,, " bit 11 = 0: No current limit alarm "
,, " bit 11 = 1: Current limit alarm "
,, " bit 12 = 0: Fast stop not in progress "
,, " bit 12 = 1: Fast stop in progress "
,, " bit 14 = 0 and bit 13 = 0: Drive controlled via terminal block or built-in keypad "
,, " bit 14 = 0 and bit 13 = 1: Drive controlled via the remote display terminal "
,, " bit 14 = 1 and bit 13 = 0: Drive controlled via ModBus "
,, " bit 14 = 1 and bit 13 = 1: Drive controlled via CanOpen "
,, " bit 15 = 0: Forward rotation requested (reference) "
,, " bit 15 = 1: Reverse rotation requested (reference) "
,,
" LRS1 " ,, " bit 0: Reserved "
,, " bit 1 = 0: No drive detected fault "
,, " bit 1 = 1: Drive detected fault "
,, " bit 2 = 0: Motor stopped "
,, " bit 2 = 1: Motor running "
,, " bit 3: Reserved "
,, " bit 4 = 0: Frequency threshold (Ftd) not reached "
,, " bit 4 = 1: Frequency threshold (Ftd) reached "
,, " bit 5 = 0: High speed not reached "
,, " bit 5 = 1: High speed reached "
,, " bit 6 = 0: Current threshold (Ctd) not reached "
,, " bit 6 = 1: Current threshold (Ctd) reached "
,, " bit 7 = 0: Speed reference not reached "
,, " bit 7 = 1: Speed reference reached "
,, " bit 8 = 0: No motor thermal overload alarm "
,, " bit 8 = 1: Motor thermal overload alarm "
,, " bit 9 = 0: No brake control (brake engaged) "
,, " bit 9 = 1: Brake control in progress (brake released) "
,, " bits 10 and 11: Reserved "
,, " bit 12 = 0: No loss of 4-20 mA "
,, " bit 12 = 1: Loss of 4-20 mA "
,, " bit 13: Reserved "
,, " bit 14 = 0: No drive thermal overload alarm "
,, " bit 14 = 1: Drive thermal overload alarm "
,, " bit 15: Reserved "
,,
" LRS3 " ,, " bit 0 = 0: The reference is given by Fr1 "
,, " bit 0 = 1: The reference is given by Fr2 "
,, " bit 1 = 0: The command is given by Fr1 or Cd1 "
,, " bit 1 = 1: The command is given by Fr2 or Cd2 "
,, " bit 2 = 0: ACC and DEC are used as ramp parameters "
,, " bit 2 = 1: ACC2 and DEC2 are used as ramp parameters "
,, " bit 3 = 0: CLI is used for current limiting "
,, " bit 3 = 1: CL2 is used for current limiting "
,, " bits 4 to 10: Reserved "
,, " bit 11 = 0: Motor 1 is not used "
,, " bit 11 = 1: Motor 1 is used "
,, " bit 12 = 0: Motor 2 is not used "
,, " bit 12 = 1: Motor 2 is used "
,, " bits 13 to 15: Reserved "
,,
" IOLR " , " 0 = inactive, 1 = active " ,,
,, " bit 0: Value of logic input " " LI1 " " " ,
,, " bit 1: Value of logic input " " LI2 " " " ,
,, " bit 2: Value of logic input " " LI3 " " " ,
,, " bit 3: Value of logic input " " LI4 " " " ,
,, " bit 4: Value of logic input " " LI5 " " " ,
,, " bit 5: Value of logic input " " LI6 " " " ,
,, " bit 6: Reserved " ,
,, " bit 7: Keypad presence: 0 = absent, 1 = present " ,
,, " bit 8: Value of " " R1 " " relay output, also accessible in write mode if R1 is not assigned " ,
,, " bit 9: Value of " " R2 " " relay output, also accessible in write mode if R2 is not assigned " ,
,, " bit 10: Value of " " LO " " logic output, also accessible in write mode if LO is not assigned " ,
,, " bit 11: Reserved " ,
,, " bit 12: Reserved " ,
,, " bit 13: Reserved " ,
,, " bit 14: 0 = AOC/AOV logic output, 1 = AOC/AOV analog output " ,
,, " bit 15: Reserved " ,
,,,
" DO " ,, " bit 0 = 0: Disable digital output 01 "
,, " bit 0 = 1: Enable digital output 01 "
,, " bit 1 to 7: Reserved "
" DO_STATUS " ,, " bit 0 = 0: Status of digital output 01 is OK "
,, " bit 0 = 1: Status of digital output 01 is not OK "
,, " bit 1 to 7: Reserved "
" COUNTERCONTROL " , " Counter01 could be either defined as eventcounter or as AB counter " ,,
,, " bit 0: Reserved "
,, " bit 1: Reserved "
, " Enable Counter01 " , " bit 2 = 0: Activate counter 01 in event mode "
,, " bit 2 = 1: Deactivate and reset counter01 "
, " EnableOverflowCounter01 " , " bit 3 = 0: Disable overflow detection counter 01 "
,, " bit 3 = 1: Enable overflow detection counter 01 (value is limited to 16#FFFF) "
, " EnableCounter02 " , " bit 4 = 0: Activate counter 02 in event mode "
,, " bit 4 = 1: Deactivate and reset counter 02 "
, " EnableOverflowCounter02 " , " bit 5 = 0: Disable overflow detection counter 02 "
,, " bit 5 = 1: Enable overflow detection counter 01 (value is limited to 16#FFFF) "
, " EnableCounter01 " , " bit 6 = 0: Activate counter 01 in AB mode "
,, " bit 6 = 1: Deactivate and reset counter 01 "
,, " bit 7 to 15: Reserved "
" COUNTERSTATUS " ,, " bit 0 to 10: Reserved "
, " OverflowCounter01 " , " bit 11 = 0: Measurement within the counter range 0 - 16#FFFF "
,, " bit 11 = 1: Overflow during period / gate measurement "
, " OverflowCounter02 " , " bit 12 = 0: Measurement within the counter range 0 - 16#FFFF "
,, " bit 12 = 1: Overflow during period / gate measurement "
,, " bit 13 to 15: Reserved "
" COUNTERCONFIG01 " , " Do only change the configuration if Counter01 is disabled " ,
, " If the external counting frequency (LI3) is used, Counter02 can't be used " ,
,, " bit 0 to 2 = 000: Reserved "
,, " bit 0 to 2 = 001: Event counter: Positive and negative edge "
,, " bit 0 to 2 = 010: Event counter: Positive edge "
,, " bit 0 to 2 = 011: Event counter: Negative edge "
,, " bit 0 to 2 = 100: Gate measurement: Positive - negative edge "
,, " bit 0 to 2 = 101: Gate measurement: Negatve - positve edge "
,, " bit 0 to 2 = 110: Period duration: Positive - positive edge "
,, " bit 0 to 2 = 111: Period duration: Negative - negative edge "
,, " bit 3 to 4 = 00: Counter frequency 4MHZ "
,, " bit 3 to 4 = 01: External counting frequency (max. 100kHz) (LI3) "
,, " bit 3 to 4 = 10 Counter Frequenzy 31.25 kHz "
,, " bit 3 to 4 = 11: Reserved "
,, " bit 7: Reserved "
" COUNTERCONFIG02 " , " Do only change the configuration if Counter02 is disabled " ,
,, " bit 0 to 2 = 000: Reserved "
,, " bit 0 to 2 = 001: Event counter: Positive and negative edge "
,, " bit 0 to 2 = 010: Event counter: Positive edge "
,, " bit 0 to 2 = 011: Event counter: Negative edge "
,, " bit 0 to 2 = 100: Gate measurement: Positive - negative edge "
,, " bit 0 to 2 = 101: Gate measurement: Negatve - positve edge "
,, " bit 0 to 2 = 110: Period duration: Positive - positive edge "
,, " bit 0 to 2 = 111: Period duration: Negative - negative edge "
,, " bit 3 to 4 = 00: Counter frequency 4MHZ "
,, " bit 3 to 4 = 01: Reserved "
,, " bit 3 to 4 = 10 Counter Frequenzy 31.25 kHz "
,, " bit 3 to 4 = 11: Reserved "
,, " bit 7: Reserved "
" Counter " ,, " Counter01(LI4) and Counter02(LI3) as eventcounter: "
,, " Event counter / gate measurement / period measurement (UDINT). "
,, " Input: Counter input LI3 - LI4 "
,, " Resolution for gate / period measurement depends on the counting frequency: (1/f) / digit "
,,
,, " T = in/f "
,,
,, " T ... Gate / period duration [s] "
,, " in ... Digital value "
,, " f ... Counting frequency [Hz] "
,,
,, " When external counting frequency is active, Counter02 input is used as frequency input. Counter02 is disabled as a result. "
,,
,, " Counter01 as AB counter: "
,,
,, " Value of Incremental encoder (DINT). "
,, " AB input: Counter input LI4 (A) "
,, " Counter input LI3 (B) "
,, " When AB counter is active, Counter02 is disabled as a result. "
,,
,, " CAUTION! "
,, " Below HW revision B5 the max. counter input frequency is 5kHz. "
,,
,, " CAUTION! "
,, " Below HW revision B0 the counter inputs are changed. "
,, " Counter01(LI3) and Counter02(LI4). "
" OutputConfiguration01 " ,, " bit 0 = 1: Reserved "
,, " bit 1 = 0: Digital output controlled by X2X "
,, " bit 1 = 1: Digital output controlled by Inverter "
,, " CAUTION! "
,, " only valid with HW revision B5 or above otherwise the digital output will not work with this configuration "
,, " bit 2 to 7: Reserved "
" Status chart based on IEC 61800-7* "
" *:Since 2007, CiA402 profile is part of the IEC standard 61800-7. Therefore DriveCom or CiA402 terminology is no more used. "
" Exiting the " " Operation enabled " " status via a " " Disable voltage " " (9) or " " Shutdown " " (8) command causes a freewheel stop. "
" Control word (CMD) "
" Status word (ETA) "
,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,